Reagan’s Supply Side Economics: Did It Work? If Not, Why Not? Research Paper College Admissions Essay Help

Table of Contents Introduction

The economics



Introduction Examination of an economy can never be complete without the examination of the two sides that make up the economy. These sides entail the demand and the supply aspects that interact with each other to bring equilibrium within an economy. Disequilibrium can cause negative impacts within the society and the economy at large.

The study of economics is a crucial subject to the society, and thus can be quite cumbersome and difficult to comprehend since it is wide. However, to simplify this subject and make it easier to understand, the subject falls into various categories with supply side of the economics being one of them. However, these divisions are theories that enhance the study of economics.

The supply-side economics, commonly defined as the trickle down economics, depicts an economic theory in relation to taxes. The theory recognizes that stimulation in the growth of the economy can be achieved through cutting down on taxes, thus enticing consumers into increasing their expenditure (Collins, 2007).

The theory also points out that in order to recover revenues lost due to reduction in taxes, the economic growth that will be experienced in the end will generate a large tax base that would consequently compensate for the lost revenues (Cooper, 2012). After the introduction of the Reaganomics, researchers rose to challenge the validity of this theory.

Controversies that faced the theory have initiated an examination of the theory in this paper. In the course of the study, this paper shall focus on the Reagan’s supply side of economics coupled with examining whether the theory was a success or not, and in case it failed, what are reasons that brought it down.

Reagan’s supply side economics advocated for the provision of tax cuts as an incentive to investors and entrepreneurs and it worked in the short run.

The economics The supply side economics pioneered under the watch of Ronald Reagan, a former US President. As aforementioned, Reagan’s supply side economics advocated for the provision of tax cuts as an incentive to investors and entrepreneurs. The idea behind this incentive hinged on the assumption that due to reduced taxes, investors would be in a position to make more savings and invest more.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The investments put in place would yield huge economic benefits that would boost the overall country’s economy (Collins, 2007). Ronald Reagan based his supply side economy on the concept of Laffer curve developed in the late 1970s by Arthur Laffer.

While coming up with this concept, Laffer stated that there would be immediate effects of tax cuts on the budget of the federal government. Moreover, “an equal tax cut would have a multiplier effect on the growth of the economy” (Collins, 2007, p.106). For instance, the proponents of the idea stated that for every dollar reduction, there would be an increase in demand, thus stimulating growth amongst businesses.

This aspect would consequently result into additional employment (Fink, 1982). However, the impact of the tax cut would be determined through examination of the growth of the economy, the initial amount of taxes, and the category of taxes to be reduced.

Firstly, the Reagan’s theory was acceptable as it fulfilled all requirement of a theory. The theory also hinged on macroeconomics and was at the verge of offering an explanation in relation to prescription of policies that would ensure stability in the growth of the economy (Collins, 2007). The theory revolved on three pillars that included monetary, tax, and regulatory policy.

With the three pillars, the common idea among them was production, which in the supply side of the economy is the most crucial determinant of the growth of an economy. However, the supply side economic theory appeared to contradict the Keynesian theory. According to the Keynesian theory, demand is the most crucial factor that can alter economic growth as opposed to supply.

Keynes argues that a lag or reduction in demand by consumers is capable of driving the economy into a recession; therefore, the government should initiate fiscal and monetary policies as intervention measures.

The proponents of Reagan’s economics believe that manufacturers (suppliers) can set a crucial pace towards growth of an economy through their willingness to create and supply goods and services to the economy.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Reagan’s Supply side Economics: Did it work? If not, why not? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, the supporters of the Keynesian theory believe that demand for goods and services by consumers are the key towards economic growth (Fink, 1982). This contention underscores the point that draws a distinction between the two theories.

The Reagan’s economic theory hinged on four pillars that included reduced federal income taxes, taxes on capital gains, reduction on government regulations, and increased government spending. There was also the idea of controlling the money being supplied and circulating within the economy in order to reduce inflation.

There had been stagflation in the US economy as characterized by an increase in the rate of unemployment and inflation among federal states. This scenario happed in the administration that existed before Ronald Reagan assumed office as the president.

Due to political pressure, the country moved on into increasing the money supply in the economy to stimulate economic growth. With the reign of President Jimmy Carter, several changes came in place including the creation of additional departments such as that of Energy, while phasing out price controls that had been imposed on petroleum.

Earlier on, other changes that had occurred included the creation of federal oil reserves coupled with complete scrapping of wage and price controls. However, in a bid to deal with the menace of stagflation, money supply would be restricted for a period of three years coupled with easing of oil supply and pricing (Collins, 2007).

With the assumption of office as the president of the United States, Ronald Reagan chose to take another path based on the urge to improve the economy. He started by stating his intentions to increase spending on the Defense Department together with initiating a decrement in taxes.

Due to these implementations by Reagan, the federal government had an annual deficit estimated to be 4 per cent of the federal government’s GDP (Cooper, 2012). However, Reagan introduced policies that brought growth in several sectors of the economy. Before he was elected into office, the Republicans considered the supply side theory as an unconventional move.

While in office, Reagan cancelled all domestic petroleum prices and controls that hindered allocation. He went ahead to reduce taxes on windfall profits in relation to oil and its products (Cooper, 2012). In 1986, the Tax Reform Act of 1986 was implemented in order to lower marginal tax rates for the rich, complete elimination of deductions, and significant increase in taxes for those in the annual earning bracket of less than $ 500,000.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Reagan’s Supply side Economics: Did it work? If not, why not? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In 1982, Reagan implemented a reduction in corporate and income taxes. Changes implemented by Reagan led to a complete change in the composition of tax revenue (Collins, 2007).

To some extent, the Reagan supply side economics succeeded, though not as anticipated. For instance, during his era, the US economy experienced a growth through the growth and expansion of business cycles and the monetary policies implemented. In addition, the economy had a positive progression since both unemployment and inflation kept on reducing (Collins, 2007).

Moreover, some economists also appreciated the fact that although Reagan did not meet all the requirements stipulated elements in his pillars, he made a remarkable progress. Due to this theory, most investors and entrepreneurs flourished courtesy of tax incentives presented by the new economic policies under the Reagan’s regime.

The economic growth hinged on the reduced tax rates and inflation in addition to reduced regulations, which led to the creation of favorable environment that allowed funding based on the conditions prevailing in the market.

Entrepreneurs also had the privilege of enjoying rewards of their success due to reduction in taxes that are believed to reduce profits generated by a business (Atkinson, 2006). Moreover, the implementation of laws that pose significant restrictions to entrepreneurs regarding the utilization of the generated profits erodes the entrepreneurs’ morale towards taking risks.

Due to the reduction on taxes charged on incomes, the economy and most businesses grew. A decrement in taxes means more disposable incomes to workers. In addition, due to increased expenditure, the demand for goods and services also increase, hence the establishment of additional businesses, which leads to additional employment opportunities (Cooper, 2012).

In addition, employees can also collectively bargain for an increment in their salaries and wage, which translates into higher revenues collected from the taxes charged. However, a decrement in taxes can influence expenditure pattern of an individual depending on his or her income level (Atkinson, 2006).

For instance, economists ascertain that reduction in taxes among low-income earners is likely to lead to increased spending and increased demand, hence growth of the economy. However, this trend might not be the case among high-income earners.

Instead, this category of individuals, given the same tax incentives, they would utilize the extra money earned through savings, investing, and paying debts incurred. This money is also channeled to stock markets and banks, which is not a significant stimulus towards the growth of the economy.

There have been controversies as to whether the Reagan supply side economics works or not because there exists challenges in finding the real world proof of this theory, as it is extremely difficult to separate the effects of reduction in taxes on the economic growth and the revenues generated.

For instance, when the former president, President Bush, initiated a reduction on taxes between 2001 and 2003, there was a positive progress on the economy accompanied by an increase in revenues. The proponents of the supply side economics attributed the change to the reduction of taxes. However, this issue attracted criticism from other economists.

Other economists “were quick to point out that low interest rates were the actual stimulators that led to the economic growth” (Cooper, 2012, p.62). The Bush government adopted the Reagan supply side economics as evidenced by the fact that the federal treasury created a model to support the idea that the tax cuts implemented by President Bush would lead to an economic growth.

In designing the model, it was assumed that revenues lost through the reduction would be compensated by maintaining a balanced budget and reducing fiscal spending. However, “this was not sustainable and the tax cuts were compensated by increasing taxes in the future, thus having a negative impact in the end” (Cooper, 2012, p.114). This move resulted in additional debts by the federal government.

Conclusion The Reagan supply side economics tended to impose tax discrimination among different levels of income earners. For instance, some of the implemented tax reforms included the reduction of nominal rates of taxation amongst the wealthy, while on the other hand raising rates of taxes among low-income earners (Fink, 1982). This aspect becomes an impediment in the implementation or restoration of a flat system of taxation.

Moreover, during Reagan’s term in office, the US economy had an increased budget deficit in addition to the federal government’s debt (Atkinson, 2006). This aspect was attributed to increase in spending arising from increased disposable incomes due to tax cuts.

President Reagan failed to know that his theory would only be suitable if he desired short-term results. However, revenues lost due to reduction in taxes in the end can only be recovered partially (Fink, 1982).

Currently, economists still research on the issue to find out whether a reduction in taxes can result into growth of the economy in the future. However, Reagan supply side economics worked in the short run as the theory can be implemented in the short run to boost a poor performing economy.

References Atkinson, R. D. (2006). Supply-side follies: Why conservative economics fails, liberal economics falters, and innovation economics is the answer. Lanham, MD: Rowman


The Home Movie Industry Research Paper essay help online free: essay help online free

Executive Summary: Movie Streaming and Movie Rental Industry A myriad of technological advances accomplished over the last three decades have become incredibly integrated within the daily lives of people. The advances have made technology become part of lifestyles of people. This situation has also resulted in the changing of the whole idea of movie renting.

The way people could access movies in the past has significantly changed based on the availability of technology-driven strategies that enable them to access them (the movies) at the comfort of their houses. In a free way, people can choose from a myriad of sources and services to view TV shows and movies today.

With the current internet technology, people can watch movies on mobile tablets, gaming consoles, mobile phones, and even personal computers. These devices require facilitating linkages. For this purpose, 3G and now 4G, and WiFi are availed. This development has taken a process besides calling for a shift of technological knowhow.

In 1990’s, there was a worldwide concern on the next technological advancement that would revolutionise the entertainment sector. In response to this dilemma, VHS libraries at homes of people were rapidly filled with DVDs, which were invented by Toshiba, Philips, Panasonic, and Sony. This case meant shrinking the entertainment libraries coupled with updating them with investments in DVDs.

Chucky and heavy wooden furniture that would often be accompanied by boxy televisions was becoming outdated. As technology continues to advance, movie streaming also continues to advance.

Indeed, the computer age is contributing towards an immense jump in the deployment of technology in film renting and streaming through facilitating investments in the development of affordable digital devices by many households. In fact, according to Broadcast Engineering, “DVDs are vastly being replaced by video files, which are condensed and then streamed instantly over the internet” (Para.1).

However, this case does not mean that DVDs are no longer pertinent because “digital movie copies, Blue-ray, and ultraviolet are also available coupled with the physical media” (Broadcast Engineering Para.1). In the modern market, various video streaming services are availed for rental purposes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The services are accompanied by a wide variety of choices. Whether one wants a physical copy of a movie from Netflix, Redbox, Blockbuster via unlimited 24-hour video stream through Amazon’s intact movie, TV free streaming of various show episodes via Hulu, and films on crackle and renting filmed games from Gamefly, a number options are available for all people to choose.

Renting movies online implies that one can stream a movie from where the renting company is situated and view it on computers and or iPods and other devices that are connected through internet.

While this strategy was difficult in the early 2000 due to low internet connectivity speeds, with the advancement in technology over the last few years, the internet speed has incredibly increased thus making many companies venture into the online movie renting business.

Unfortunately, as argued in the paper, not all people are able to rent movies online due to the limitation associated with screen sizes of the internet-enabled devices such as iPods and Ipads and or limited availability of TVs, which can be connected to computers.

In the development of a strategy for enabling Blockbuster to be successful in the movie streaming business, system compatibility is yet another issue. Consideration of system requirements that would make it possible for a movie to play in the right way is necessary.

For the currently operational movie streaming companies, fees are levied based on every movie watched or through subscription to a monthly membership. However, in all these options, movies renting is time-limited.

How and what Blockbuster should do to improve and advance in the movies renting industry Company Background

Formally referred to as Blockbuster inc., Blockbuster LLC is a home-movie company that is based in America. It provides video and movie renting services formally via movie rental shops, which are owned by the company and or through franchises. As technology developed, the company later embarked on offering movie rental services via streaming, DVD-by-mail and through cinema theatres.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Home Movie Industry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The company reached its operation summit in 2004 upon securing almost 60,000 staff members. In the early 2011, about 500 Blockbuster stores were in operation in the US (Molly Para.2) being located within 17 nation’s word wide. This case was an immense reduction from above 9000 stores that the company had in 2004.

This fall is attributed to poor strategic management and planning coupled with competition from companies such as Netflix, Apple Inc. and others. Indeed, competition has resulted in immense reduction of the company’s revenue levels. Due to this challenge, the company made an application for bankruptcy in 2010. On 6 April 2011, the company was sold to dish network through auction at a price of $233 million (Jordan 12).

The assumption value for liabilities coupled with other obligations of the company was valued at $87 million. The acquisition process for the stores of the company that are located in the US was finalised on 26 April 2011.

As Fritz reports, “Blockbuster announced on 16 Jan. 2013 that it had placed her subsidiaries located in the UK in the hands of administrators with possibilities of risking about 4000 jobs” (12). However, the placing of the company on administrators does not influence stores that are situated outside the UK.

They are still operational. For continued operation of these stores, an immediate strategy is required to re-engineer the growth and performance curve of the currently decaying Blockbuster. However, before taking this path, an understanding of the trend of movie renting industry is vital.

Industry Overview

The movie rental industry is made up of companies, which engage in the business of renting movies that have been recorded in the physical media (typically discs that have video games and movies). It entails “subscription for various in-store media coupled with mail-distributed rentals” (Fritz 12).

Currently, web movie streaming and on-demand rentals are also services that are offered in the movie rental industry. Apart from the fee charged on renting movies, the industry also generates revenue from the built-up fees that are levied on late returns. The industry can also earn income following a voyage of excess media materials when the preliminary order for a given videos dies.

In the US, the movie rental industry has been facing a number of challenges, particularly ones, which are associated with technological shifts. The industry is also composed of firms that incredibly compete with substitutes such as TV and or the internet rental.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Home Movie Industry by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More These competitions influence adversely operators in the industry while every firm attempts to develop various operational strategies that would make it remain relevant and a key player in the industry market.

Seeking competitive strategies has resulted in pushing players in the movie renting market to offer different services, as opposed to traditional physical disc renting services. Over the last five years, this strategy has created avenues for growth of some firms in the industry such as Redbox and Netflix while others like Blockbuster are on the declining end.

According to Broadcast Engineering, research on the movie rental industry shows that there have been immense changes in market share of the industry (Para.2). For instance, in 2011, consumer rental for Blue-ray discs and DVDs fell at 11% in comparison to 2010. In 2010, consumers who tapped VOD accounted for about 33% of the movie rental (Broadcast Engineering Para.1).

In 2011, Redbox led physical movie renting in which its unit volume sales increased by 29 %. This increase resulted in the growth of Redbox’s Blue-ray and DVDs from 25% in the year 2010 to 37% in 2011 (Broadcast Engineering Para.2).

A report by NPD showed that these gains by Redbox were associated with deteriorating businesses of brick-and-mortar organisations including Blockbuster, which experienced a drop of 6% in market share in 2010 (Broadcast Engineering Para.3). In 2011, Blockbuster experienced even worse drop since its market share fell by 17 % (Broadcast Engineering Para.2).

On the other hand, Netflix’s market share reached its lowest point (25%) in 2011 before it started to peak through late 2011 to 2012. Therefore, Redbox has been dominating the movie rental industry through its deployment of good strategic planning and management of the industry’s dynamics.

Using the success of Redbox and Netflix as benchmarks, the following section discuses the strategies that can be deployed by Blockbuster to regain its market share.

Strategies for Success of Blockbuster

In the US, Blockbuster has sold most of its stores. As argued before, her stores in the UK are already placed under administrations. The only option left for the company is to seek success in terms of performance in her stores located outside the US and the UK.

Analysis of the success factors of both Redbox and Netflix may give rise to a number of strategies that Blockbuster can deploy to enhance her performance. However, working on increasing the value of the company stands out as a significant strategy, which while deployed by Blockbuster, may enhance the company’s success in the stores outside the US, the UK, and possibly re-emerge in the US movie renting industry.

Analysis of a firm’s strategies is critical in providing insights that may help it to succeed both in the short and long run. Netflix and Blockbuster deployed different strategies that were meant to enhance the competitiveness of the companies in terms of gaining both market shares and increasing revenues.

Some of these strategies included price lowering for services offered in comparison with the rival companies (Jordan 13). This strategy was perhaps beneficial to customers since they would have to pay a less amount of money for services offered by the different companies. Arguably, this strategy was an attempt to increase the market share for the respective companies.

For instance, “Reed Hastings, the CEO of Netflix, endeavoured to target about 20 million customers by 2012” ((Fritz 12) through price reduction strategies. This figure implied roughly 20% of the entire US homes. This pressure made Blockbuster consider deriving a strategic move to counter the effect of Netflix.

Blockbuster removed late fee charges on DVDs thus making the company lose about $1 billion in revenues (Jordan 15). While this would have encouraged customers to rent movies from the Blockbuster stores, Netflix resorted to buying rights from various movie producing companies including Hollywood.

This step helped to increase the range of product choice available for its customers. The strategy also made Netflix surpass Blockbuster in terms of performance.

The discussion above provides a hole that Blockbuster can seal to enhance its success by strategically focusing on product line expansions. One of the ways of accomplishing this move is to strategically focus on acquiring content licensing while still integrating web technology to enhance renting movies through video streaming.

However, it is essential to note that content deal is expensive. Nevertheless, since exclusive deals are vital for sustained success of an organisation in the movie renting industry, Blockbuster cannot certainly forfeit this opportunity.

However, in the implementation of this strategy, care should be taken to ensure that Blockbuster does not ascend to terms that are unfavourable for the long-term success of the firm. Therefore, Blockbuster needs to take into consideration the effects of content deals such as winner’s curse effect before entering contractual agreement with movie producing organisations.

The winner’s curse effect is the effect that occurs when acquiring firms fail to benefit roughly on average based on benefits that are associated with acquisitions (Jin 34).

The argument here is that, despite the fact that it is crucial for an organisation to consent to short-term losses for the sake of long-term profits since content deals are expansive, a comparative analysis needs to be done to leverage benefits and the anticipated expenses associated with the content deal agreements.

Although strategically focusing on mechanisms of enhancing profitability of an organisation is critical for its success, profitability can only be enhanced through effective leadership. As argued before, poor strategic planning and management resulted to the bankruptcy of Blockbuster in the US.

The question that may ring in the minds of people who are well acquitted with the historic past performance of Blockbuster is how new entrants into movie renting industry such as Netflix and Redbox could manage to out power mega organisations such as Blockbuster. It took Redbox and Netflix to strategically focus on resolving mistakes experienced by Blockbuster to become movie renting industry leaders.

These mistakes were related to poor leadership. Indeed, executives of Netflix understood clearly the necessity of embracing emerging technologies in enhancing the delivery of movie renting services.

Before Blockbuster realised the potential of technology to reorient the execution of movies renting business, Hastings- the CEO of Netflix- had realised the significance of internet streaming as a strategy for enhancing consumer convenience and the introduction of a virtual organisation, which is capable of delivering services without flaws.

In line with the above argument, Reed Hastings was well ahead of the technology curve that could later reshape the movie renting industry. However, this strategy does not mean that Blockbuster was not aware of technological trends in the movie renting industry.

It was just inflexible by clinging on its past theoretical perspectives of enhancing performance. These strategies failed the company thus prompting it to lose its market share to its competitors such as Redbox and Netflix.

One of the reasons that perhaps made Blockbuster lose was its underestimations of the availability of broadband amongst Americans in the early 2000. On the other hand, Reed Hastings recognised that renting of video cassettes would result in movie streaming over the internet in the near future. Inspired by this focus, Netflix began to work on TV box that would make it possible to stream movies.

The only drawback was that the TV box spent almost 20 hours to finish a single video download. Although Blockbuster knew well this move was a likely future technology, it found Netflix endeavour not worth risking. Later, the management strategically focused on expansion of sales via beefing up sales in stores.

Arguably, in this context, Blockbuster neglected the importance of technology in enhancing the success of an organisation through re-engineering service delivery in the movie renting industry. This negligence was later to produce cumulative and serious impacts on the operation of the company that would also culminate into the acquisition of the organisation in 2011.

This exposition means that Blockbuster needs to take advantage of every innovation in the industry besides questioning how such an innovation would relate to the company’s line of business in relation to how it may better its competitiveness and hence out power its rivals. Rebox and neflrx followed this path with no future regrets.

In 2005, faster broadband emerged enabling YouTube and other 2.0 websites to compress videos. Reed recognised that time has arrived for him to strategically focus on cannibalising the video rental industry through exploitation of the video streaming opportunity. He was also able to identify successful strategies and those that would fail.

For example, Reed recognised the limiting nature on over concentration on TV boxes. Rather, he strategically focused on adopting open-source approaches to enable Netflix to distribute movies to computers, TVs, and mobile phones among other devices.

Arguing how effective this strategy would be in helping Netflix to become one of the key players in the movie renting industry, Halal reckons, “Netflix did the unthinkable- they give away streaming movies and made its easy” (Para. 5). This direction of thinking is worth adopting by Blockbuster.

The company also needs to consider capitalising on areas that may help in the attraction of consumers in a bid to retain them. Netflix provides a good example of how this strategy can be done. While Blockbuster pursued its business through charging $5 for every movie rented, Netflix was busy attempting to establish the probable loopholes in the pricing strategy.

It realised that consumers were unhappy with this strategy thus hating late return fee charges. Netflix sealed the gap by allowing its subscribers to have time-limited subscriptions in which customers would have unlimited rental on a monthly basis within that time. This case made the difference between the success of Blockbuster and Netflix.

Conclusion In any industry with players whereby each player has an equal ability to take away the market share of the other, an organisation should strategically focus on looking for ways of enhancing the success of the organisation in relation to their competitors.

In the paper, malfunction of Blockbuster is argued as being instigated by the failure of the company to recognise the significance of this assertion in the development of business strategies of the company. This outcome requires embracing good and strategic leadership.

Strategic leadership implies visionary leadership, which enables executives to analyse various strategies that would enable their companies to succeed in the future. For Blockbuster, these strategies include recognition of the place of technology in organisational success and the need to deliver services to customers in a convenient way.

Works Cited Broadcast Engineering. Research shows changes in movie-rental market share, 2012. Web.

Fritz, Ben. “Dish network wins bidding for assets for assets of bankrupt Blockbuster.” Los Angeles Times (2 may 2011): 12-13.

Halal, Bill. How NetFlix Beat Blockbuster: An Exemplar of emerging technologies, 2012. Web.

Jin, Yangsoo. The dynamics of the movie industry: Theatrical exhibitions and DVD rentals. Wisconsin: University of Wisconsin, 2007. Print.

Jordan, Andrew. The Effects of Netflix and Blockbuster Strategies on Firm Value. CMC senior thesis, 2011. Web.

Molly, Tim. 300 More Blockbuster Stores Closing, 2013. Web.


Serial Position Effect Analytical Essay essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Research Findings

Real Life Example


Introduction Serial Position Effect describes a situation where the ability to recall items in a list varies as the position of an item on the list changes. It states that items at the start of the list and at the end have a higher chance of been remembered as opposed to items in the middle. Primacy Effect is the tendency to remember an item in the beginning of serialized items.

On the other hand, the ability to recall items at the end of a list is called Recency Effect. Reasons have been developed to explain this phenomenon. However, the earliest reason for Primacy Effect is long-term memory while the reason for Recency Effect is immediate memory (Neely


Exploring Mythology of Fuku and Zafa in Junot Diaz’s The Brief Wondrous Life of Oscar Wao Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

At the very beginning of the novel called The Brief Wondrous Life of Oscar Wao, the author explains the meaning of fuku – “…generally a curse or a doom of some kind; specifically the Curse and the Doom of the New World” (Diaz 1).

These explanations frame the main theme of the novel that is confined to describing the miserable life of Oscar and his family, as well as his failed attempts to become recognized and find love in life.

Within this context, the novel argues that the curse, or fuku, pursues Oscar and his family across generations, dooming them to tragic accidents and the character’s inability to find love and reconciliation. Nevertheless, the author hopes for zafa as a counteraction for all burdens that the de Leon family faces. The story itself is aimed at reverting the negative experience of the immigrants.

To enhance the theme of fuku, the author refers to the flashbacks from the past to describe the hard experience that Oscar’s relatives had to face. This is of particular concern to the protagonist’s mother Beli and his grandfather Aberald.

In particular, the chapter dedicated to Beli’s difficult life as she was raised in abusive families. Similar to her son Oscar, Beli cannot settle her personal life because of her social status. Her further fate is also followed by complications, and she is doomed to become a social outcast.

To emphasize the evident presence of the curse, the author writes, “she was in the grips of the Darkness, passed through days like a shade passes through life” (Diaz 160).

Although she is always on the edge of death while undergoing hardships due to the fuku, the heroine manages to survive as the Godlike Mongoose helps her. The undertone of magical realism is intertwined with the story’s events to fit in the concepts of fuku and zafa as something natural happening to the characters.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To render the mystery and mythological themes of fuku, the author experiments with various styles and assigns different narrators in the chapters of the novel. Specific attention requires Oscars’ speech that presents a language premised on his knowledge of fiction, the so-called ‘nerd’ literature.

Use of new words and phrases creates connection between the real world in which the surrounding people live and fictional world with which Oscar is obsessed. Most of the phrases like “I do not move so precipitously” (Diaz 39), or “I think she’s orchidaceous” (Diaz 35) are skillfully combined with literary language.

In addition to the autodidactic speech, there is an evident combination of Spanish and English languages that point to the protagonist’s ancestry. The presence of various dialects also explains the author’s close adherence to the mythology of fuku and zafa.

For instance, the fictional narrator of the story Yunior makes use of the mixture of both languages, representing the identity and alter ego of Junot Diaz. The choice of the narrator, however, changes from one chapter to another to convey various perspectives on a specific occasion.

The importance of introducing various speakers on the part of the novel establishes the level of author’s engagement into the story, as well as his relation to the theme of fuku and zafa in his life.

In The Brief Wondrous Life of Oscar Wao, Diaz often resorts to symbolism and symbolic relations between characters, which is typical of magic realism style. In this respect, fuku is symbolically represented through the governmental authorities and antagonists, including the cruel dictator Trujillo who persecutes Oscar, his mother, and his grandfather.

In contrast, the novel also represents the golden mongoose, symbolizing zafa. This animal is also an immigrant because it originates from Asia, Europe and Africa. Similar to the Oscar family, the mongoose migrated to the Dominican Republic.

We will write a custom Essay on Exploring Mythology of Fuku and Zafa in Junot Diaz’s The Brief Wondrous Life of Oscar Wao specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Although the creature is considered as a representative of alien culture, the mongoose is depicted as a cunning and amicable animal that successfully socializes and communicates with other characters (Diaz 40). The Mongoose’s identification with zafa is also represented in many scenes of the novel. For instance, the animal helps Beli to survive during the attack by Trujillo’s people.

Oscar also encounters the golden Mongoose who protects him from the dangerous confrontation. Although the creature exists in real nature, its mysterious origins are highlighted by its sudden appearance and disappearance in the story. Beli and Oscar’s encounters with the mongoose cannot be proved because none of the characters can determine whether the creature is real or the product of their imagination.

Throughout the novel, Diaz does not only refer to science fiction through flashbacks, symbolism and language, but also creates a fictional framework imposed on the reality in which the protagonist lives. Constant interaction with fantasy and imaginary worlds creates a link between historical background of the characters involved into the plot and the supernatural events.

From the first pages, the author establishes a peculiar style of exposition of novel details through references to the supernatural. In addition, there is also a constant metaphorical comparison of the leading heroes in the story, including Trujillo’s agent who is depicted as the Witchking of Angmar, and Diaz’s constant questioning about the sci-fi reality of Santo Domingo (Diaz 1).

Involving fantastical elements in the narration seeks to provide a fictional perspective for readers to grasp the spectrum of influences on the part of antagonistic powers personifying fuku. Moreover, the curse of negative consequences is represented through the surreal dictatorship of the Dominican leader.

In addition, the book relies on the surreal events relating to Abelard and Beli who often confront serious challenges, but manage to survive. Hence, constant denial and acceptance of reality contributes to the overall mystery of the fuku and zafa reflection in the novel.

In conclusion, strict adherence to mythological concept of fuku and zafa shape the contextual framework for deliberating on the story events and characters’ negative experiences. In particular, fuku represents the hardships that every family can ensure, specifically those who migrated from other countries and who are regarded as social outcasts.

In this respect, de Leon family is subjected to constant suffering due to the dominance of Trujillo’s power and his influence on fates of the Oscar’s family members. In order to disclose the theme, the author resorts to such literary devices as flashback references, language peculiarities, and symbolic relationships that strengthen the main scope of curse and its opposition.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Exploring Mythology of Fuku and Zafa in Junot Diaz’s The Brief Wondrous Life of Oscar Wao by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Therefore, both fuku and zafa are the leading concepts highlighting immigrant experience and relating the eternal confrontation of the new world with the limits created by identity, culture, and personal outlooks on life. Diaz introduces the story as a response to hard experiences of the immigrant families.

Works Cited Diaz, Junot. The Brief Wondrous Life of Oscar Wao. New York: Riverhead Trade, 2008. Print.


A Review of Eating Chinese: Culture on the Menu in Small Town Canada by Lily, Cho Essay online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Literary Techniques


Works Cited

Introduction Lily Cho has authored several books with comparable thematic focus. Most of her works focus on the issues of immigration and citizenship. In her book, “Eating Chinese: Culture on the Menu in Small Town Canada, she perceives Diaspora as a model of immigration” (Cho 18). In this book, Lily Cho focuses on Chinese restaurants dominating Canada despite tough rules and racism legislations on immigrants.

The book depicts how the Chinese restaurants are in every corner of Canada, yet individuals rarely mention them. She examines how the undermined Chinese immigrants’ culture, enriched the mainstream culture of Canada. The book covers both the politics of the old and modern Chinese immigrants in Canada. This review focuses on the use of literary devices in the development of themes in the novel.

Literary Techniques Literary techniques are extensively applied in this novel to enhance the expression of key massages and themes in the book. Cho applies paradox to show the disappearing and yet present Chinese restaurants in Canada. Chinese, restaurants are unusually visible yet invisible.

The Chinese held their Diaspora history through their food and restaurants. They were able to influence the colonialists and the natives of Canada through their cooking. Chinese restaurants also represent the past, which is firmly struggling to fit into the present.

Most of the themes are developed using symbolism; for instance, the Chinese restaurants menus’ represent different times and experiences of the Chinese in the Diaspora. The Exclusion Act of 1923 had its menu. The period of multiculturalism after the abolition of Exclusion Act also had its menu.

The Diamond Grill menu of the 1950s explains a period of transition from the policy of exclusion. Canadian food is only well defined in the small town restaurants of the Chinese. One way of defining the Diaspora theory of the Chinese immigrants is through food. This is due to the widespread serving of the Canadian food in every Chinese restaurant.

Cho uses food as to mediate between Chinese immigrants and their colonial masters. She uses food as a symbol, which serves to bring both the British colonialists and Chinese immigrants together. The Chinese also retained their culture by not abandoning their indigenous practices. For example, food enabled the Chinese immigrants to retain their cultural identity at a time when the colonial forces were extremely oppressive.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The use of repetition is evident in this text. For instance, Chinese restaurants are highlighted in various sections of this book to emphasize the dissimulation and not assimilation. The restaurants stress the experiences of the Chinese in a foreign land.

Thus, restaurants menus become the means of expressing Chinese theory of Diaspora, and this makes the book memorable and comprehensible. There is a difference between the food on the menu and the food served.

The menus are symbolic accounts of what it meant to be a Chinese immigrant in Canada. There were restrictive immigration laws and multiculturalism issues. The menus in this book further reflect the socio-political situations of being a Chinese in Canada.

Cho ingeniously utilizes illustrations and photographs with no sources or dates. This portrays the break down in the history of the Chinese immigrants in Canada. Photographs are also symbolic, and they assist in tracing the early Chinese immigrants’ restaurants in Canada. This is the only way Cho is tracing the history of Chinese immigrants in the Diaspora. They bring nostalgic memories of the past bound by sadness.

However, the author does not like to refer to history, and when she does, history is only meant to portray humor. For example, the story of a Chinese woman lumbers’ camp cook masqueraded as a male.

This could imply that the experiences of the Chinese in the Diaspora have not received the attention of many scholars and writers. Moreover, the pictures used for illustrations are from unnamed sources. Hence, they never continued any date to indicate the timeframe in history. It shows the missing link in the history of the Chinese immigrants that traveled to Canada.

Conclusion Cho’s work bridges the missing link in the academic arena of Diaspora theory and works. Food, restaurants and menus symbolically present her work. The primary strength of this novel is demonstrated by the successful application of different symbols, images, history, and references in expressing the themes. These features make the book readable.

We will write a custom Essay on A Review of Eating Chinese: Culture on the Menu in Small Town Canada by Lily, Cho specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The second strength of the book is its expression of the concept of Diaspora, which many scholars have often ignored in their analysis. This makes her work more authentic and unique. Indeed, criticisms of Diaspora theories are missing in most literary works.

Chinese restaurants are Diaspora counter-public. Nevertheless, Cho does not fully explore the Chinese history in Canada. Hence, readers may not have the real picture of what she presents in her literary work.

Probably, this was not her agenda in the book. The fact that Cho borrows from other writers show her inability to conduct her own thorough research. Overall, the book provides a valuable insight in understanding the theory of Diaspora experience.

Works Cited Cho, Lily. Eating Chinese: Culture on the Menu in Small Town Canada, Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2010. Print.


The Liberal Position of Democrats and Republicans Essay (Critical Writing) college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction



The Immigration Issue



Introduction The United States of America has majorly been a liberal society where the will of people is given priority. It is believed that people should be left free to work and enjoy the fruits of their labor. In addition, individuals come first than society and therefore any government should place the people first.

In this regard, the right to own property and the principles of capitalism are given great emphasis whenever leaders stand to speak to the public. However, agreement is not unanimous and there has been arguments regarding the role of the state. The republicans and the democrats have different views regarding where the principles of “Minimal State” and “Active State” should apply.

Democrats Democrats believe that it is the role of the government to protect its people from exploitation by others. As a result, they usually propose implementation of tax that would in turn be used to give vital services to the less privileged. On the same note, democrats believe that economic inequality is a social evil and thus advocate for government intervention to ensure equality is attained (Rossides, 1998).

They are also accommodative and believe that over time, the principles of governance will have to change. Consequently, democrats tend to be “Active State” liberals as far as the economy is concerned but advocate for a moderate state in social freedom.

Republicans On the other hand, republicans are conservatives who believe that there are some issues in society that cannot change. They are very strict in matters of social morality and thus oppose in totality issues like gay marriages. Conversely, they have special regard in property rights and less government interference in economic affairs of the nation (Rossides, 1998).

In other words, republicans stand for less social freedom and increased economic freedom. Therefore, they are known to advocate for minimal state in economic matters but active state in issues affecting morality, national defense and crime.

The Immigration Issue An example of an issue that can depict how differently the republicans and democrats look at issues is the immigration debate. The American government has made significant strides in ensuring that its border, especially with Mexico, is impervious. However, people still illegally find their way into the U.S. In this regard, the Dream Act was proposed to put into check these issues.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Democrats support this Act which seeks to provide legal status, education and jobs to individuals who came to the United States when under sixteen years of age but are yet to attain the age of 30. On the contrary, republicans propose stiff measures like sending all illegal immigrants back to their home countries (Rossides, 1998).

On this issue, democrats are depicted as “Minimal State” liberals and republicans as “Active State” liberals. Libertarians on the other hand argue that those already in the U.S. whether illegally or not should be left while measures should be taken to curtail illegal immigration in future.

Conclusion Each party has different thoughts on different issues. While one party supports freedom in economic issues, the other encourages social freedom. Therefore, one cannot conclusively say that a given party qualifies to be called “Minimal State” or “Active State” liberals.

In this regard, depending on the nature of the issue being addressed democrats or republicans can fit either description. Nonetheless, both parties believe in protecting private property and some freedom for people.

Reference Rossides, D. W. (1998). Social Theory: It’s Origins, History, and Contemporary Relevance. Lanham: Rowman


The Prince by Niccolo Machiavelli Essay (Book Review) cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Imperativeness of the book and its theme

The book’s ideals and key concerns or areas




Introduction This paper presents a detailed review of an interesting book titled “The Prince” that convey vital principalities of leadership. The book was a masterpiece work of an Italian who was a renowned historian, and a diplomat called Niccolo Machiavelli. The writer was also known as a strong politician who had noble political ideals and theories.

Despite developing his writing skills from a humble background, his insightful narratives have been instrumental in transforming individual’s social and political lifestyle. This explains why the book that has been branded as a traditional peace of work by critics due to its “mirrors of prince style” remains one of the innovative political narrations of the day.

Imperativeness of the book and its theme Indeed, the information contained in the book has been instrumental in transforming political activities in various settings. It has been helpful in inculcating noble ruling guidelines and principles among leaders.

It adopted a political theme with an aim of enhancing leadership by fostering democracy and understanding through integration of effective ruling principalities (Machiavelli, 2004). The author focuses on the theme due to the unfair experiences and treatment that he was facing because of bad governance and oppressive rule.

The book’s ideals and key concerns or areas The book focuses on leadership ideals and effective principalities that shape good governance or political practice. Its aim is to convey credible information about political issues and the role of leaders in the development of cohesive societies (Landon, 2005). Machiavelli opens his narration or political observation by stating that all forms of dominion in various jurisdictions are republics or principalities.

He asserted that, any leader who seeks to exercise good leadership should adopt noble principalities (Machiavelli, Skinner


Classical Liberalism: A Faction within Ideology Essay (Critical Writing) essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

To What Extent Liberals Are the Same?

To What Extent Are They Different?


Reference List

Introduction Liberal ideas date back to medieval times when people were overwhelmed by a variety of restraints. People longed for freedom or, at least, some amount of liberty. Therefore, the major postulate of liberals has always been quite the same. Liberals has always claimed that individual freedom is the basic right of all people.

Human society evolved and numerous socioeconomic factors affected development of liberal ideology and contributed to its spread. Notably, contemporary liberals have often been seen as a faction within a larger context of Liberalism due to peculiarities of their beliefs.

To What Extent Liberals Are the Same? It is necessary to note that liberals remain faithful to the core values. Thus, they proclaim individual freedom to be the most important. For instance, Ball and Dagger (2002, p.47) note that contemporary liberals promote “individual liberty by trying to guarantee equality of opportunity within a tolerant society”. Liberals tend to proclaim the importance of equal rights for all citizens.

These ideas are rooted in the medieval times when people had no freedom at all and were overwhelmed by numerous conventions. Another core value of liberalism is free competition. They believe competition to be an inherent part of a liberal society.

They argue that competition is an important factor leading to progress (Ball


Home Video Rental Industry Report (Assessment) essay help: essay help

Home video rental industry is a technology intensive industry. Technology provides several growth opportunities and challenges. It provides an opportunity for companies in the industry to stream movies to their customers. However, it also increases competition from other sources of movies. This necessitates companies in the industry to develop efficient development strategies to cater for the current and future needs of the customers.

In addition, efficient strategies would help in strategic positioning of the company to enable it to cope with the changes in the market. Failure to develop efficient strategies would lead to the ultimate collapse of a company. Netflix and Blockbuster are some of the major players in the home video rental industry.

Both Netflix and Blockbuster rely heavily on online streaming of movies on demand for a sizeable percentage of their revenues. Amazon and iTunes, other major players in the industry, also enable customers to download movies online for a certain fee. Downloading movies online is the trend that is likely to continue in the future. This necessitates companies to look for efficient platforms to distribute their movies.

Gone are the days when companies relied heavily on physical distribution of their movies via mail or certain drop-off points. Companies desire to be market leaders in the industry should strive to make watching movies at home faster and easier (Greenwald para 3). Grown in online consumption of products necessitates companies in the industry to shift their focus to online sales.

Analysts predict that online sales of movies will surpass sales of DVDs in the near future (Frankel para 3). This would greatly benefit companies that are market leaders in online sales of movies. These include Amazon and iTunes. The major benefit of online sales is the low cost of management. This is because companies do not need a physical presence to operate in the areas. Customers only need an internet connection to access the movies regardless of their geographic location.

For companies in the home video rental industry to acquire a competitive edge, they should have a wide collection of movies. Having a wider collection of movies would enable companies to compete effectively with other sources of movies, which include cable TV.

Having a wider collection of movies would also increase customer loyalty to a company as they are guaranteed of getting the movies they desire. In addition, diversification of services would enable companies in the industry remain profitable. One of the major areas of diversification for companies in the industry is provision of games.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Netflix is one of the companies that has the best chance of survival in the industry, which is changing rapidly. In 2011, Netflix created Qwikster in an attempt to split its subscription model. The Qwikster brand would deal will solely online subscription of movies while the Netflix brand would continue offering DVD services.

The company opted to implement this strategy as it realized the importance of online sales of movies for its future growth. Netflix introduced the Quikster brand in an attempt to phase out its DVD sales business. However, this strategy failed. Netflix continues to offer both DVD services and online subscriptions of movies.

Online subscriptions now account for a sizeable percentage of the company’s revenues (Stelter para 5). The failure of Quikster led to a significant fall in Netflix’s share value and profitability. However, the company is slowly repairing its reputation.

Works Cited Frankel, Daniel. “Forecast: Online demand for movies, TV shows will top DVD sales this year.” PaidContent. 2012. Web.

Greenwald, Will. “Change or die: Netflix and the future of home video.” PCMag. Web.

Stelter, Brian. “Netflix, in reversal, will keep its services together.” The New York Times. 2011. Web.


Hotel and Hospitality Management: A Case study of Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis, Switzerland Report (Assessment) essay help: essay help

Executive Summary The current report explores restaurant and hotel management activities carried out at the Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis, Switzerland. In the report below, the writer has endeavoured to use placement experience gained while at the Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis, classroom knowledge, and available literature related to management practices in the hotel and hospitality industry.

Hospitality management, food and beverage management, and experiential marketing have been explored and applied in the case study. Based on the analysis, Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis provides quality services with the objective of meeting the ever changing demands and expectations of customers. Through food and beverage management, the organisation has been successful in Switzerland’s hospitality industry.

Introduction to the Report Background, Purpose and Method of Report

The hospitality industry is one of the most competitive industries because the demand and expectation of consumers are always changing. In order to ensure that the demands and expectations of customers have been met successfully, it is important to have in place the necessary hotel and restaurant management skills.

In addition, food and beverage management skills have found application in different departments of the hospitality industry such as catering which involves food preparation and serving.

In addition, it is also important to manage effective decisions and practices with respect to quality of services and products. Also, practices related to marketing and brand promotion and other operations are also necessary in hotel management.

The current report is a case study carried out at Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis, Switzerland. The report explores the various restaurant and hotel management activities conducted at the restaurant.

The aim of this management in practise report is to relate how Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis operates in relation to the knowledge gained while the writer was undertaking a BA in Hotel and Hospitality Management. The report blends personal experience at the Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis, classroom knowledge, and available literature related to management practices in the hospitality industry.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Profile of Company

Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis is one of the luxurious restaurants in Switzerland. The restaurant which is located on the shore of Lake Lucerne gives a scenic view to tourists as they enjoy mountain views and panoramic lake views (Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis 2012). Some of the special features provided at Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis are free parking, free Wi-Fi, a wellness centre, an outdoor pool, and a lakeside terrace.

In addition, the restaurant provides sunbathing lawn, heated outdoor pool, a solarium, a hot tub, and a steam bath. The restaurant is also famous for its major global delicacies, including international cuisines such as French cuisine, and a variety of fish specialties. In addition, the restaurant also provides additional activities that include horse riding, diving, library, hot tub, fishing, and sauna (Hotel Beau Rivage Weggis 2012).

Some of the key services that the restaurant offers its customers are packed lunches, laundry, banquet facilities, room service and a tour desk, among others.

Theoretical Review (Literature) One of the biggest challenges faced by managers in the hotel and hospitality industry in the 21st century is to offer customer satisfaction and sustain it in the long run (Williams 2002). The increase in the level of competition and customers’ expectations calls for the provision of quality services and products.

In this case, improving customer satisfaction and providing customers with high quality services have emerged as the major fundamental factors required to boost the performance of hotels and restaurants. Hotels and restaurants that provide good services and products to their customers tend to improve their profitability in the end (Dominici


Employee Motivation Theories Essay online essay help

David Chung is a young manager who believes in giving others the freedom to discover their talents, and thus reach their heights. In addition, he believes that everybody has a goal in life and will try to achieve the goal if given the opportunity. Therefore, he applies the goal-setting theory of employee motivation.

This theory argues that the ultimate aim of every individual is to achieve a clear and specific goal (Miner, 2012). On the other hand, John Lim is a relatively old guy with experience in management having held the position of a manager for a long time.

He believes that employees need a favorable working environment in order to maximize their output. Using Herzberg’s two-factor theory, he oversaw implementation of the working processes to the expectations of employees.

On the same note, David believes that for good result from employees the urge to stop working must be reduced. Utilizing the theory of self-determination, David believes his employees will always know the best way they can execute their duties to increase output (Beck, 2004).

On the contrary, John does not believe in too much freedom and thus wants work to be accomplished as per the laid down rules. He, therefore, applies goal setting theory of motivation in his management style. This is the reason why employees under him can stay behind to complete their work. According to the goal setting theory, specific and challenging goals have a high influence on performance (Robbins


Do increases in tuition fees reduce access to post-secondary education in Canada? Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Introduction Quality education is one of the public goods that every nation endeavors to deliver to its citizens by enacting relevant education policies. While in many nations including Canada, basic education is delivered by the state at much subsidized costs, financing post-secondary education causes people to dig deep into their pockets both in the developing and developed world.

From an economist perspective, increasing the prices of public goods has the impact of reducing the demand for the public good. In this sense, increasing the fees for post-secondary education would mean a reduction in the accessibility levels. This paper seeks to provide a response as to whether this economic view applies for the case of Canadian post-secondary education.

Impacts of increasing tuition fees on accessibility to post-secondary education in Canada Affordability limits accessibility levels

Hiking of fees for post-secondary education makes it only affordable by the wealthy people. This claim means that the less fortunate people would not have equal accessibility levels with the more fortunate members of the society (Kirby 268).

Indeed, over the last 15 years, the tuition fee paid by Canadians has grown to thresholds that make fees account for the largest expense that is encountered by university and other higher education institutions students. This hiking has been attributed to cutting down public funding on post-secondary education by the federal government (Coelli 1072) and provincial governments (Easton and Rockerbie 194).

Over the last two decades in Canada, a sharp cut from 84 percent to 57 percent on post secondary funding from the public kitty has been experienced. Over the same period, tuition fees grew on an upwards trend right from “14 percent of operating funding to over 34 percent” (Coelli 1081).

This growth produces multiple impacts on the affordability of post-secondary education when compounded with a reduction in public spending on post secondary education. The overall effect of the reduction of funding of post-secondary education by the federal and provincial governments is that post-secondary education has shifted from a public-focused model to a more privatized fee model.

Consequently, a rapid increment of fees without necessarily being accompanied by increased economic wellbeing of the Canadians makes the accessibility to post-secondary education fragmented and segregated based on people’s economic status. Hence, increasing tuition fees makes post-secondary education less affordable for middle and low-income households in Canada.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Relationship between debt level and post secondary education completion rates

Although a reduction of public funding on post-secondary education has the impact of making low and middle-income families have limited accessibility to education as argued above, some critics argue that such families can still gain access to the education through debts.

Their point is that the costs of education can be transferred into some future time meaning that increasing tuition fees would have minimal or even no impacts on the accessibility levels if the students would have accessibility to government and or other sources of educational loans (Finnie 156).

While the above argument remains valid, research on the impacts of high tuition fees on post-secondary accessibility proves otherwise. For instance, Statistics Canada reports that low income families’ students are “less than a half as likely to participate in university than those from high incomes families” (17).

In further support of this finding, Statistics Canada and Human Resources and Skills Development Canada conducted yet another research referred to as ‘youth transition survey’ on which it found out that amongst the reasons cited by secondary school graduates for not participating in post secondary education was related to financial reasons (156).

British Columbia researcher by the name Lori McElroy echoed similar results in his study that found out “students with little or no debt were more than twice as likely to finish their degree as students with high levels of debt” (McElroy 5). Based on these findings, debt levels are negatively correlated with post-secondary completion rates.

Therefore, even though many people may consider funding the otherwise expensive post-secondary education with the readily accessible credit, risks associated with the credit may make people shun away from indulging in credit commitments in their pursuit of post-secondary education.

The above argument is not only supported by the discussed scholarly results within Canada. Elsewhere in the world, for instance in the US, similar results are obtained. For example, the University of California researchers based in Lose Angeles found, “for every $1,000 increase in tuition fees, enrolment rates dropped by 15 percent” (Kane 11).

We will write a custom Essay on Do increases in tuition fees reduce access to post-secondary education in Canada? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Kane‘s study further demonstrated, “decrease in enrolment was composed almost exclusively from minority and low-income students” (Kane 12). Putting these results in the Canadian context, Canadian Association of University Teachers conducted an analysis of long-term effects of increasing tuition fees as “a proportion of after tax income in Canada” (205).

The research found out that increasing tuition fees produced the most pronounced impacts on the poor people in Canada. This case implies that accessibility of credit for funding post-secondary education whose fees has been on the rise for the last two decades does not reduce the impacts that high tuition fees has on accessibility levels to post-secondary education.

Bursaries and loans have mild impacts on absorption of negative impacts on high tuition fees

Before the implementation of the education policy, every government will have evaluated the short-term and long-terms impact of the policy. In the US and Canada among other nations, the government is aware that the rising of tuition fees would obviously have negative implications.

For instance, according to Finnie, the Charest government planned to reinvest 35 percent on the total amount of money generated through hiked post secondary education on bursaries and loans through the financial aid program (159).

The reinvestments are meant to ensure that those students who already have accessibility to bursaries would get more funding through bursaries and loans coupled with attracting more loan and bursary recipients.

Since post-secondary bursaries allocation in Canada is done based on proof of the need of financial aid, application of this idea would mean leveraging the impact of the rise in tuition fees on the middle and low-income families to bring them at par with students from wealthy families.

Putting in place such a strategy would mean exploration of exclusion policies based on financial endowment of the Canadians. Bearing in mind “40% of parents, independently of their revenue, do not help their children financially during their studies” (Finnie 161), the impacts of such an exclusion policy are expected to be spectacular before the public eyes.

The argument here is that financial aid in response of the impacts of the financial hike on the accessibility of post-secondary education among middle and low-income households would not aid in the absorption of the resulting negative impacts of the fees hike.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Do increases in tuition fees reduce access to post-secondary education in Canada? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More If the financial aid program is to absorb a significant amount of negative impacts of post-secondary education fee hikes, it needs to apply to all students irrespective of their financial status.

Being a post-graduate does not necessarily mean having the power to finance education that is more expensive

The notions behind increasing fees for postgraduates rest on the platforms of the argument that people with an advanced degree have the ability to earn more during their work lifespan in relation to the low-skilled people. For this reason, justification is made for escalating “international students, PhD, and masters degree students’ fees” (McElroy 13).

In this context, McElroy argues that universities in Canada have over exaggerated the earning of advanced degree holders in pursuit of higher fees (13). This exaggeration makes post-secondary education institutions charge fees beyond the market expectation and capability. Therefore, few graduates would seek access to post-graduate education.

Basing the reason for increasing fees for postgraduate education on the assumption that post-graduates earn more in the labor market is flawed since it ignores that they also pay more incomes taxes, which in one way or another land in the basket for paying the costs of post-secondary education.

The underlying argument is that, irrespective of the targeted population seeking post-secondary education in Canada by high fees, the accessibility to post-secondary education is influenced either directly or indirectly. The condition is shoddier for intercontinental and higher-grade students.

As Kirby confirms, “While undergraduates, unlike the graduates, are not enrolled all year round, they do not pay fees during the months of summer” (273). Compared to alumnae, those still in college and or universities do not only have to disburse lower tuition charges but also disburse less charges for during a usual winter and fall school program.

In 2010, international students had their tuition fees increased by 5.2 percent in Canada. Such an increase is prohibitive to accessing post-secondary education in Canada by the international students. Therefore, the more the tuition fess is hiked for graduate and international students, the more the chances of losing accessibility to Canadian post-secondary education.

From the Veronique’s argument, “tuition hikes in the 1990s in the rest of Canada had decreased the participation in post-secondary education for youths from families earning less than $75 000 per year” (Para. 4), increase in tuition fees for undergraduates would mean a pronounced negative impact on post-secondary education accessibility levels.

Conclusion Therefore, based on the expositions made in the paper, it suffices to point out that, in the effort to build a skilled human resource capital base in Canada, post-secondary education is inevitable. Knowledgeable people have low felony rates, improved public activities, and reduced expenditures on health matters.

In the modern Canada, a university degree is becoming almost a primary requirement for full participation of the citizens in the economy. Based on these benefits of post-secondary education, it would be almost imperative to presume that post-secondary education needs to be made easily accessible in Canada for all people irrespective of their social economic backgrounds.

Unfortunately, as argued in the paper, this is not the case. Over the last two decades, there have been rising tuition fees for post-secondary education institutions in Canada. The paper held that, for all levels of education (postgraduate, graduate, and even undergraduate), increasing tuition fees has had the impact of reducing accessibility to the respective post-secondary education level.

Works Cited Canadian Association of University Teachers. “The Economics of Access: The Fiscal Reality of PSE Costs for Low-Income Families.” CAUT Education Review 8.2(2006): 205-217. Print.

Coelli, Michael. “Tuition fees and equality of university enrollment.” Canadian Journal of Economics 42.3(2009): 1072-1099. Print.

Easton, Stephen, and Duane Rockerbie. “Optimal government subsidies to universities in the face of tuition and enrollment constraints.” Education Economics 16.2(2008): 191-201. Print.

Finnie, Ross. “Student loans, student financial aid and post-secondary education in Canada.” Journal of Higher education Policy


Reception of Al Pacino Essay best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Reception of Al Pacino by fans and reviewers




Introduction Al Pacino is widely known for his villainous roles in The Devil’s Advocate, Scarface, The God father and several others. His depiction of these roles resonated with audiences owing to its unconventionality and charisma.

Reception of Al Pacino by fans and reviewers Reviewers thought that Al Pacino’s depiction of gangsters was quite unusual but refreshing. Not only did the actor portray those roles with great depth, but he also handled the various complexities of their characters flawlessly.

The genre had been marred by depictions of gangsters as distasteful individuals whose interactions with their families largely centred on disagreements with them. However, Al Pacino, in The Godfather, sought to depict another side of the mafia life.

The film supported the notion that these were organisations in which their leaders’ families were royalty. The head would protect his family and work alongside them to get compensation for his work. 1

The author Barbas Samantha explains why certain fan bases existed for an actor, such as Al Pacino. The proliferation of the mass media as well as modernisation in the early 1900s meant that the relevance of religion had diminished.

Furthermore, crowded cities had no room for the sincerity and morality preached in the nineteenth century. At the time, individuals needed to look for a way of redefining themselves and standing out from the crowd. Therefore, society created the notions of charisma, style and personality.2

While this phenomenon of the personality cult was relatively new in the 1930s, it persisted in film depictions until the 1970s. Definitions and portrayals of personality also altered significantly in these four decades. Al Pacino attracted a lot of attention because his type of charm and personality was new in the industry.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He was an underdog in the criminal world whose magnetism was unmistakable. His fan base consisted of similar underdogs who could resonate with his obsession to achieve the American Dream by all means necessary.

Al Pacino’s films invite spectatorship by a certain group of people. Male underdogs can relate to these films because many of the motion pictures portray countercultures. Gangsters in the films stereotype masculinity through their tough persona and choice of words; this explains why men are likely to embrace it.

Underdogs are likely to embrace the films, as well, because most stories are responses to the rot or corruption that exists in society. These villains choose criminal lifestyles because the straight and narrow path is dysfunctional.

Members of a counterculture are invited into Al Pacino movies because they resonate with his motivations. The criminal world is simply a way out of poverty or a mechanism for achieving the American Dream, albeit illegally. 3

It is likely that Al Pacino appealed to certain groups and not others owing to the futility in his actions. Additionally, not everyone may get carried away by the charm and appeal of a certain actor. Some audiences pay more attention to the story line and what eventually happens to the main performer. Gangster movies often cause one to support the criminal, but the individual often gets what he deserves.

This leads to a lot of annoyance and frustration by those who supported him. Consequently, persons who have made it in life through conventional means will not embrace Al Pacino because they believe in the straight and narrow. They see no need to choose criminality as it is futile. These audiences are more interested in morality lessons rather than mere charisma.

Conclusion The actor, Al Pacino epitomises America’s obsession with the underdog or bad guy. He represents a counterculture that connects with several members of countercultures. Even those who sympathised but did not belong to the underworld also enjoyed his films.

We will write a custom Essay on Reception of Al Pacino specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Bibliography Barbas, Samantha. “The cult of personality.” In Movie crazy: fans, fans, stars and the cult of celebrity, 35-57. New York: Palgrave, 2008

Cowie, Peter. The Godfather book. New York: Faber and Faber, 1997.

Snyder, James, “Scarface nation.” Time, November 19, 2009.

Footnotes 1 Peter Cowie, The Godfather book, (New York: Faber and Faber, 1997), 150.

2 Samantha Barbas. “The cult of personality,” in Movie crazy: fans, fans, stars and the cult of celebrity (New York: Palgrave, 2008), 37.

3 James, Snyder, “Scarface nation,” Time, November 19, 2009, 11.


Silver In Spanish America Essay college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Major Arguments- Silver in Spanish America



Introduction The discovery of silver in the Spanish America changed the regional parts of the country. There were two main areas of silver mining that were explored in the sixteenth century.1 The regions included the northern and western parts of Mexico City; Zacatecas, Guanajuato, and the Potosi. Potosi was commonly referred to as the mountain of silver.

It was situated in the Peruvian Andes. Zacatecas was predominantly an arid land with infertile soil and poor rain distribution. It drew a great deal of attention from many after the discovery of silver. There was a problem of labor shortage as the demand increased due to the high numbers of industries and mining companies.

As the main administrators of the region, the Spanish crown was ready to receive tax from the locals. The cash collected was used to fund the Spanish economy and also guard the vast empires all over the world in terms of military funding.

The crown claimed all the land rights in the region, but as a way of attracting labor and investment from private individuals, it embarked on a state-directed means, and to some extent, private initiatives to lure a strong labor force and more investment. Capital was a necessity in funding all the mining activities and future explorations.2

Major Arguments- Silver in Spanish America Indians and Mestizo laborers were lured into the ridges from Mexico. They were offered relatively high wages and attractive incentives such as rewarding loyal workers in terms of promotion, medical cover, and being given time off to spend with their respective families.

This ensured a large pool of workforce and improved the mining processes. African slaves also formed part of workforce in the region. And in this effect, the Trans Atlantic slave trade increased. This promoted the rise in the number of deaths as the slaves brought with them new diseases. The slaves were also overworked to death.

Influx of people into this region brought a lot of challenges in terms of population increase and insecurity issues. The large population required a lot of food to remain healthy. A settlement scheme was required to cater for the rising population in the area.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the New Spain, silver workers constructed a kind of aristocratic labor force with relatively greater privileges and freedom as compared to the Indians who were held in Encomianda. Accidents were also common in the mining sites. Therefore, the area was so dangerous; lives were lost.3

“Hispanization” also spread swiftly across the country and mostly among the Indians, Mezistos and the African workers in Zacatecas compared to anywhere else in New Spain. Therefore, Spanish workforce ensured the required jobs were done. The collective force created increased efficiency of the work and greatly improved the output. Common language meant an ease of communication.

Directions and orders were clearly understood. It also became easy to solve disputes as both sides clearly expressed their feelings in a common language. The rising of industries in the region was also significant.4 This helped to cater for the vast population’s needs of food and clothing.

Therefore, textile industries mushroomed as well as food industries. This also involved the artisan work and craftwork. The diverse employment opportunities helped improve the living standards of the people in the region as they got regular income from the activities they engaged in. Trade also became another important event that resulted from the silver discovery.

There was a need to have middlemen and suppliers of various goods. A great deal of consideration was given to the high number of deaths that were recorded due to new diseases that were introduced by the incoming population of foreigners from Europe. Europeans came to trade silver while some came with the intention of exploring the lands and the silver mines.

This implied that they stayed there for long. Exploration took a lot of time and so interaction with the locals was inevitable. There also emerged a great interest in education as people developed an interest for record keeping.5 European traders and explorers also introduced some analytical techniques such as observing, analyzing, arranging and recording of issues.

These were quickly adopted by the locals who saw the need to keep records of their activities and possessions. There also changed perception about wealth. Land was no longer the basis of determining a person’s wealth as other valuable things emerged such as precious metals like silver.

We will write a custom Essay on Silver In Spanish America specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Bibliography Bauer, Wise. The story of the world: history for the classical child. Charles City, VA: Peace Hill Press, 2003.

Marichal, Carlos. Bankruptcy of Empire: Mexican Silver and the Wars between Spain, Britain, and France, 1760-1810. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2007.

Stein, Stanley. Silver, Trade, and War: Spain and America in the Making of Early Modern Europe. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press, 2000.

Footnotes 1 Wise Bauer. The story of the world: history for the classical child (Charles City, VA: Peace Hill Press, 2003), 34.

2 Stanley Stein. Silver, Trade, and War: Spain and America in the Making of Early Modern Europe ( Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press, 2000), 45.

3 Stanley Stein. Silver, Trade, and War: Spain and America in the Making of Early Modern Europe (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press, 2000), 56.

4 Carlos Marichal. Bankruptcy of Empire: Mexican Silver and the Wars between Spain, Britain, and France, 1760-1810 (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2007), 98.

5 Wise Bauer. The story of the world: history for the classical child (Charles City, VA: Peace Hill Press, 2003), 34.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Silver In Spanish America by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


A Time Capsule from The 1960s Creative Essay best essay help: best essay help

This time capsule was unearthed successfully and all the artifacts from the ancient time were still inside the rustproof metal casing. The casing was sealed and the numbers ‘1964’ were written on top of it. Thereafter, the casing was taken to the laboratory for analysis.

It was later discovered that it had been buried in the ground since 1964. Before the casing was opened, detailed forensic analyses such as x-ray micrographic study were carried out (Cooper, Hedges


Disruption of Identity Essay college essay help near me

American identity is an issue that has attracted serious debates in social, economic and political spheres. In the USA, naturalization is one of the mechanisms of acquiring citizenship. In this case, a person born in another territory that is not part of the U.S is granted citizenship through successful application.

One of the challenges that most immigrants in America have had to grapple with over the years is identity crisis and the social cultural issues associated with it. This paper discusses how identity affects American immigrants.

Since the American society is based on an immigrant heritage, the origin and identity of the Americans is commonly linked with a dedication to an ideology and recognition of primary values rather than common ancestry and history.

Identity refers to the unique traits belonging to any particular person, or shared by all affiliates of a given social unit or group. A person’s identity occurs when he or she identifies with a considerable others such as family members and society. This implies that American immigrants have to adopt new values and practices in order to fit into that society.

At present, it is not easy to define an American since the country has witnessed a great change in the composition of its inhabitants. It is evident that immigration and multiculturalism are instrumental in shaping the American identity.

Many individuals see multiculturalism as one of the mechanisms of creating the “American mosaic” that accommodates the distinctive cultural heritage of various ethnic units, some of whom try to safeguard their indigenous languages and ways of life. In other words, a person can be an American and still maintain his or her racial and ethnic identities.

Some Americans have adopted the concept of multiculturalism and formal learning institutions further promote it. For instance, the curricula of both primary and secondary learning institutions in America promote the understanding and appreciation of cultural multiplicity by exposing learners to various social and cultural practices.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, critics of multiculturalism aver that it creates tension in the American society because it encourages the existence many cultural practices, which might jeopardize the unity of the Americans.

Thus, critics of multiculturalism perceive America as a “melting pot” in which various individuals emigrating from various nations can easily be assimilated and accommodated. Many surveys indicate that majority of the American population support the “melting pot” postulation, which encourages American immigrants to embrace the American traditions and language.

Majority of Americans are confident that the government and economic systems promote democracy and equality in the American society. However, as new American immigrants embrace new social cultural practices, they gradually abandon their cultural heritage and eventually lose their original identity.

For instance, the initial Hispanic immigrants adopted American English and way of life and the same has been witnessed over the years among the American immigrants.

Language is an indispensible tool for propagating social cultural practices in different societies worldwide. For example, it is through language that people get to understand their origin, migration and development through time and space.

As American immigrants begin to speak English, they gradually lose their identity because they learn the American lifestyle through language and they feel that by speaking English they are being modernized. Consequently, many American immigrants end up losing their identities in the process of being Americanized.


Interest Groups: Good or Bad? Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Majority of advanced societies are pluralistic. Accordingly, divergent views and interests have led to the formation of interest groups within these societies. Interest groups are, thus, a common feature in advanced liberal democracies. Examples of interest groups include businesses, labour unions and professional associations.

Interest groups aim at drawing attention to their interests in order to put pressure on political institutions. Therefore, interest groups are a sure way of demanding service from the political class. Nonetheless, if not well regulated, interest groups can exert unnecessary pressure to the political class.

Consequently, unpopular policies are formulated and enacted. Therefore, interest groups can have positive and negative impacts on a democracy. This essay looks at merits and demerits of interest groups to a democracy.

One of the objectives of a democratic process is representation. Interest groups present the sentiments of a group to a government and the general public. Therefore, interest groups are one of the most important instruments of democracy. Virtually all political opinions are shared by a group of people. For instance, there are pro-life, pro-choice, gun rights advocates and other interest groups in the US.

Representative governments or moralistic political cultures believe that a significant number of electorates do not participate in policy making. These governments or cultures are, thus, built on the notion that most voters involve themselves in the political process through elections only. Interests groups are formed to counter this notion. Interest groups, therefore, supervise an elected government.

In most instances, these groups conduct research and create position statements on specific issues. These statements are later presented to politicians. To win over their support, politicians are compelled to pay attention to interest groups. In addition, interest groups use legal action to achieve objectives that are almost impossible to realize through legislation.

Interest groups have been known to influence the government into making very useful legislations. However, interest groups have also compelled political institutions to pass laws that are unpopular with the masses. In view of that, interest groups can distort an almost perfect democratic process.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Furthermore, some interest groups are heavily funded and well connected. Consequently, the playing field is not level for all interest groups. In most cases, governments act on issues raised by interest groups that are politically active. Therefore, other electorates who are not part of powerful interest groups are locked out of the political process.

Moreover, it is difficult to join some interest groups. For instance, it is impossible for a low-class or middle-class citizen to join an interest group made up of wealthy businessmen. Policies made under the influence of such interest groups are more likely to favour financial elites than the low-class and middle-class citizens.

Interest groups are an important element of any vibrant democracy. People’s will is presented to politicians and the general public through interest groups. Accordingly, most government policies are an outcome of the competition between various interest groups.

However, influence of the ‘big money’ is real in politics. Therefore, rich and well connected interest groups receive more attention from elected leaders. For that reason, there is no level playing ground for all interest groups. This has led to some interest groups dictating policies that are not consistent with the interests of the majority. Therefore, unless controlled, interest groups can be detrimental to a country’s democratic process.


Definition of Geography Research Paper college essay help: college essay help

Table of Contents First Explanation

Second View

Works Cited

First Explanation According to the International Geographical Union (1), geography is a multifaceted discipline that seeks to explain how one component of the environment merges with another in their natural elements. This merger also defines how the society produces and organizes itself to either complement the natural process or inhibit/destroy it altogether (International Geographical Union 1).

The human role in understanding geography surfaces in this regard. Through this conceptualization, geography describes how different human factors interact with nature to produce the society’s understanding of the environment.

Different issues are in play here. Some of them include the interaction of space, places, and regions to provide a pattern of eventual geographical outcomes, both in the short-term and long-term (International Geographical Union 1).

Through the above understanding, the contribution of geography to existing bodies of knowledge is more precise because the interaction of the natural environment and human realms denote the interaction of space and environment.

Here, the role of human realms in geography symbolizes the role of space in understanding geographical processes (these are the principal notions of studying geography) (International Geographical Union 2).

However, the International Geographical Union (2) says, in some spheres, space defines the interaction of the environment and human activities but considering natural processes are already defined by environment, the concept of space tends to rely a lot on human activities.

Geography therefore provides a more integrated and holistic understanding of the interaction between space and the environment to provide people with a more in-depth understanding of their environments, regions and places. This understanding provides a deeper understanding of how different regions relate and how human factors and natural processes in one place may affect the environment in another place.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This way, decision-making processes (involving geographical factors) simplify and the subsequent planning, forecasting, and predicting processes become more holistic and interactive (International Geographical Union 2).

Second View Unlike the first view of geography, Geography Today (1) provides a broader and deeper understanding of geography. It says geography is a broader understanding of the world we live in.

Through this conviction, geography stands out as a crucial platform for understanding the characteristics of the earth, like the people who inhabit the world, the landscape that supports human life, places, and environments.

Through this explanation, Geography Today (2) posits that the understanding of geography is essential in providing a compromise between human science and physical sciences.

Unlike the first view, the involvement of human elements in understanding geography stretches to the inclusion of culture, political systems, and economies – to understand how such social, economic, and political dynamics interact with the environment.

Therefore, through this understanding, geography shows how the inequalities, similarities, and differences among these factors interact to describe our environment. In addition, through the same analysis, geography stands out as an ideal platform to show how different disciplines merge into one framework of analysis (Geography Today 2).

Through this understanding, it is common to see geographers consulted as critical contributors when making crucial decisions regarding resource distribution and environmental management.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Definition of Geography specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Comprehensively, in its broadest understanding, geography provides a manual to explain how people should live and interact with the environment.

Regardless of the methodology of learning, the understanding of geography produces well-informed citizens who consequently become knowledgeable and sensitive to environmental factors. This way, it is easier to understand how the world is interconnected (Geography Today 2).

Works Cited Geography Today 2012. What is geography? Web.

International Geographical Union 2012. What is Geography? Web.


The Conditions of the Working Class in England Expository Essay essay help online

How the Industrial Revolution Affected the Conditions of the Working Class in England with References to Society, Economy, and Technology

The 19th century can be characterized by the shift from accentuating the role of the humans in manufacturing and in the economic process to emphasizing the possibilities of machines for the industries’ development.

In his book The Conditions of the Working Class in England, Friedrich Engels discusses the effects of the Industrial Revolution as the main event of the 19th century for the workers in England, paying attention to the situation in Manchester and Liverpool.

Engels as one of the most influential social scientists and political theorists of the 19th century provides the complete discussion of the challenges which the working class in England experienced under the impact of the Industrial Revolution in 1844, and the significance of the work is in the fact Engels’s work is based on his own observations of the situation in England.

According to Engels, in spite of developing technologies with inventing the steam engine and jenny and contributing to the economic growth with increasing the gains, the Industrial Revolution influenced the society negatively, making workers the “slaves” in the industrial world where human forces were changed with machines. Thus, the inventions led to the “radical change in the state of English workers” (Engels 52).

First of all, to characterize the period of the Industrial Revolution from the point of its impact on the social and economic development, it is necessary to pay attention to the inventions which made the revolution possible. The changes in the technological process of many industries were based on the invention of the steam engine and jenny.

Thus, “the history of the proletariat in England begins with the second half of the last century, with the invention of the steam-engine and of machinery for working cotton” (Engels 50).

It was the start of the Industrial Revolution which further changed the basic principles of the English economic and social systems. The approach to manufacturing was changed significantly, and the industries’ productivity could move to the higher level.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a result, the changes and improvements in the technological process led to the changes in the economic rates of the country. The new technologies contributed to making the process of producing goods faster and more effective. Thus, the public demands increase and the costs and prices decrease.

The industries’ productivity changed with using machines results in making the goods more available for the population. This situation becomes extremely influential for the economic progress of the country in which the main accents are made on commerce. It is important to note that the accentuation of the national wealth in the context of the successful free trade between countries can be discussed from several perspectives.

Although the economic growth dependent on the active usage of the new technologies as a result of the Industrial Revolution can be observed in Great Britain during the second half of the 19th century, Engels states that the positive effects of the revolution for the economy cannot be compared with the negative consequences of the process for the workers (Engels 64).

It is necessary to pay attention to the fact that in spite of all the positive effects of the Industrial Revolution for the country’s economy, the changes in the industry process led to the decline of the English society. The intensive development of industries resulted in people’s migrating to cities in search of work, but the hand-work were no longer required much because of using machines instead of people.

The working class was demoralized by the need to work almost for free under the pressure of employers (Engels 147). Engels pays attention to the fact that the workers became the slaves of the property owners under the impact of the economic competition developed as a result of the Industrial Revolution (Engels 114).

It was impossible to speak about the security for the workforce, and the workers suffered from different kinds of pressure which resulted in their mortality from disease the level of which was higher in cities than in the rural territories.

To look at the issue from the larger perspective and analyze the isolation of the workers from each other and any facilities, it is possible to refer to Engels’s words, “the dissolution of mankind into monads, of each which one has a separate principle and a separate purpose, the world of atoms, is here carried out to its utmost extreme” (Engels 69).

We will write a custom Essay on The Conditions of the Working Class in England specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Industrial Revolution is the most influential event of the 19th century which contributed to changing the principles according to which industries and economies developed and affected the conditions of the working class significantly, depriving them from jobs and any social guarantees.

It is important to pay attention to the Engels’s approach to discussing the problem because the theorist presents the evidences of the real social situation in England caused by the Industrial Revolution in 1844. Engels’s arguments are necessary to be referred to while discussing the positive and negative effects of the Industrial Revolution for the Western Civilization.

Works Cited Engels, Friedrich. The Conditions of the Working Class in England. London: Penguin Books, 1987. Print.


Diabetic Renal Disease Essay college essay help: college essay help

Introduction Diabetic renal disease also known as diabetic nephropathy is a medical condition which affects an individual’s blood sugar level as well as the kidney. This condition is characterized by persistence in albuminuria, reduced glomerular filtration rate and the increase in blood pressure within the arteries.

Research findings have shown that kidney disease is a complication that is associated with diabetes. Diabetic nephropathy has been a major course of kidney complications in those infected and a significant course of mortality. The disease is usually diagnosed after urinalysis and screening of the patient in relation to diabetes (Mogensen 2006, pp.640).

The albumiburia level is usually measured so as to determine whether the patient is affected by this condition. Early treatment is therefore very vital in preventing or delaying the onset of this condition. It particularly affects those patients who are affected by diabetes mellitus.

The high blood sugar levels in the patient usually result in the incapacitation of the kidney hence hindering the normal functioning of this organ. It becomes difficult for the kidney to filter blood hence resulting in full blown diabetes.

Under normal condition, the capillaries in the kidney are not damaged and hence act as filters to the unwanted substances in the blood. When these capillaries are damaged due to diabetes, these substances are not filtered and hence the impurities are retained in the blood (Lewis 2009).

The increase in blood glucose forces the kidney to filter much blood. When this condition persists over time the system collapses and blood proteins are passed to the urine a condition known as microalbuminuria. When this worsens, the condition is known as macroalbuminuria and this is characterized by huge amounts of proteins being found in the urine (Bennett 2005, p. 338-342).

The patient diagnosed with this complication is characterized by a number of signs and symptoms which include the dilation of the renal artery. The patient is likely to have fluid build-up, insomnia, general body weakness, loss of appetite, difficulty in concentration as well as stomach upsets.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When a laboratory test is carried out, such a patient is likely to have proteins in his/her blood. This is due to the damage caused on the capillaries in the kidney as evident in the specimen.

The system that helps in filtering the blood is damaged hence the blood proteins pass through the damaged capillaries into the urine. The patient is also likely to have an enlarged kidney as evident in the specimen. The risk of hypertension is quite high in this particular patient (Makita 2010, p. 963-975).

The patient with this condition is prone to cardiovascular diseases due to the damages caused on the blood vessels. This can be seen in the provided specimen as the blood vessels on the kidney appear to be swollen. Kidney failure is quite evident in the patient diagnosed with this condition.

The patient is also likely to pass urine that is full of foam. This is due to the high protein as well as glucose levels in the urine. The patient is also likely to have blurred vision.

This is caused by the damages on the blood vessels. Those blood vessels at the back of the eye or the retina are not spared. Once they are damaged, they start bleeding and hence cause the patient to have a blurred vision and in severe cases blindness might occur.

The patient is also likely to experience the narrowing of the arteries that lead to the kidney and have skin ulcers that take too long to heal. The patient is prone to peripheral nerve dysfunctions. The hypertension is basically due to the narrowing of the artilleries. There is poor circulation of blood in the blood vessels hence causing high blood pressure and hypertension (Brenner 2012, p. 4777).

The skin ulcers that take too long to heal are caused by the damage that occurs on the blood vessels. It therefore becomes difficult for the white blood cells to be transported to these areas. The concentration of antibodies in these areas is very low hence the difficulty in the healing of these ulcers.

We will write a custom Essay on Diabetic Renal Disease specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Kidneys of a person affected by diabetes nephropathy retain excessive water and salts in the blood. This in the end results in increased blood pressure and hypertension. The excessive fluids are trapped within the body organs hence causing facial and leg swelling. The blood vessels in the specimen appear to be swollen which is primarily caused by the retention of excessive fluids by these vessels (Levey 2004, p.40-51).

The kidney in this specimen appears to be severely damaged hence its inability to perform the normal function of filtering impurities from the blood. The patient is therefore likely to have form in his/her urine due to the inability of the kidney to retain blood proteins and glucose within the blood.

The same is therefore passed to the urine. Hypertension is also caused by the fact that precipitated proteins are deposited in the blood vessels. The patient is also prone to conditions such as anemia, bone diseases and acidosis. In a normal person, the kidney is able to process the proteins in the blood unlike the diabetic person whose proteins cannot be synthesized hence are released into the urine.

The microvascular inflation is quite evident in diabetic patients as evident in the specimen provided. Most of the blood vessels are inflated due to the precipitation of protein particles on the membranes of these vessels (Watkins 2006, p. 293).

This particular patient is also prone to edema. This is a condition characterized by the swelling of the legs. The major cause of this is the retention of the interstitial fluid. The fluid is secreted into the interstitium and it is not easily drained away hence causing the legs to swell.

Edema is also caused by the biochemical and structural changes that are witnessed in the blood capillaries in the kidney as evident in the specimen shown. The vessels are made more permeable hence making it easier for the fluid to go through and be retained in the body tissues hence causing edema.

The tissues and blood vessels in the specimen appear to be swollen. This is due to the retention of excess water within these tissues hence causing the swelling (Hasslacher 2005, pp.234).

This patient suffering from the diabetic nephropathy is also likely to be witness an increase in weight. This is caused by the continued retention of fluid blood into the system hence causing the body to gain more weight (Ritz 2009, p. 302).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Diabetic Renal Disease by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More There are several remedies aimed at the prevention or slowing down of the diabetic kidney disease. One of the ways for the prevention of this condition is the intake of drugs that reduce the blood pressure. These drugs are aimed at protecting the kidney glomeruli and lower protenuria hence protein molecules are not passed to the urine. The most widely used drug is the lipsinopril (Selby 2009, p. 33).

Angiotensin Receptor Blockers are also used with the intension of ensuring the normal functioning of the kidney and lowering the wearing down of capillaries within the kidney hence slowing down the effects of the diabetic renal disease. Antihypertensive medicine is therefore very important in such a case.

It is also recommended that patients with this condition consume foods that are low in protein levels so as to prevent the onset of the kidney failure. Glycemic control is also quite crucial in the prevention or slowing down of this condition.

Patients with this condition are prone to high sugar or glucose levels hence the need to control the same. Insulin is quite important in the conversion of this glucose to energy and when the body does not respond to the insulin produced the same accumulates in the blood vessels hence causing hypertension (Whelton 2012, pp. 113).

Monitoring and controlling of blood sugar levels is very important in the prevention of this condition. In some cases, it might be necessary to administer insulin after meals or after intensive body activity so as to ensure that the ingested food is converted to glucose and broken down to produce the energy required by the body so as to avoid the build-up of glucose in the blood stream.

In cases where the disease has become full blown, dialysis and kidney transplant is the best remedy. Dialysis is quite vital in cleaning impurities out of ones blood in cases where the kidneys have failed. The blood is usually pumped out of the body and passed through a special filter that removes the impurities and it is then returned to the blood stream (Bakris 2012, p. 919).

The patients with diabetic renal disease need to keep their glucose levels at less than 7 percent and this can only be achieved through continuous check-ups. Insulin injection, issuing of the appropriate medication and proper diet are quite crucial in this case.

Physical Exercise is also important in such patients so as to facilitate the conversion of ingested food to glucose which is broken down for the provision of energy to the body. Appropriate measures should be taken to maintain low blood pressure of not more than 130/80. It is also important to measure the efficiency of the kidney by determining the protein levels in the urine.

For such patients, it is important to ensure that the average blood glucose is maintained at 155 mg%. Diabetic nephropathy patients who have been well taken care of should have lower cholesterol levels in their blood and reduced blood pressure which also reduces the risk of hypertension (Bojestig 2008, pp. 259).

The Metabolic Syndrome and obesity is mostly associated with the failure of the kidney to respond to insulin. The condition prevents the normal functioning of insulin particularly in the conversion of food into glucose and further breakdown of the same for the production of the energy for the body. The condition t leads to an increase in the glucose levels in the blood.

The blood vessels are blocked hence leading to high blood pressure. The most affected are the people who do not exercise, those who take in food rich in glucose/sugar and those on a high-protein diet.

These conditions are quite conducive for one to become diabetic hence the need for people to check their diets and lifestyle. An increase in people with the metabolic syndrome and obesity would imply an increase in people developing diabetic complications (Ziyadeh 2006, p.103).

Diabetic Nephropathy Kidney Specimen

List of References Bakris, G. 2012, ‘Calcium channel blockers versus other antihypertensive therapies on progression of NIDDM associated nephropathy,’ Kidney International , vol. 33 no. 1, pp. 919.

Bennett, P. 2005, ‘Prevention of diabetic renal disease with special reference to microalbuminuria,’ Med Pub , vol. 15 no. 5, pp. 338-342.

Bojestig, M. 2008, ‘Declining incidence of nephropathy in insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus,’ New England Journal of Medicine , vol. 44 no. 5, pp. 359.

Boner, G. 2003. Management of Diabetic Nephropathy. New York: Taylor


Africa in an African Perspective Essay argumentative essay help

Ways in which Africa and Africans are represented by Africans

Description of Africa in an African perspective can be as problematic in the same manner western representations are about Africa. The continent has been marred by political issues ranging from democracy, national elections, economic status and cultural practices from different corners of the continent. In Africa, political issues affect beyond political environment, economic and social aspects are also affected.

There has been an increased case of corruption, which signifies a lack of accountability and ethical leadership within most African countries. Rising cases of political instability have led to problems such as widespread violence, change of leadership and embezzlement of aid funds. The problems of sub-Saharan Africa are further deepened by genocidal conflicts, diseases, poverty and economic stagnation (Mengara, 2001).

The film Motherland, which is African-owned cinema, represents the glory and majesty of Africa and at the same time calls for unity, self-determination and the rebirth of Africa.

According to the film, Africans became black within the period they were being enslaved. Slavery was designed to disconnect the African from having any positive notion of their Motherland. Languages used in describing parts of Africa like ‘sub-Saharan Africa’ are used with the intention of dividing and conquering the continent.

According to the film, such terms have been used to confine Africans to corridors of make-believe locations without any political affiliations (African Union), ethnicity (Tuareg), and economic status (COMESA) and with historical and physical boundaries, by use of names such as Sudan and Mali. The same aspect is revealed through post-colonialism perspective in the Yeelen film (Mengara, 2001).

African development presents an important factor in the many discussions about Africa and Africans. The rate of development within the continent has contributed to its positioning within the global politics. Such developments focus on technology, economic status, infrastructure, disease prevalence and socio-economic inequalities.

Analysis of the conflicts in Africa or the reality behind political processes has become difficult since numerous factors are considered in the process of investigating causes of such conflicts. Based on African Renaissance movement, comprised of intellectual agencies, the real definition of Africa should be based on African creativity and knowledge on cultures.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This makes African identity a contested concept since there are multiple identities from various perspectives. There has been rising difficulty in conceptualizing the real identity since the discussions are based on factors such as; defining African identity in relation to the rest of the world, definition in relation to each other with many considerations on migration and xenophobia.

How do these representations differ from those in the first section of the course?

There is a raw synergy of films and history on the description of Africa as a continent and Africans. The first representation focused so much on the negative aspects of Africans, portraying them as the most violent race in the world. This is purely from a Racists perspective. The elaborate representation of black freedom and power struggles across political spectrum left everything on self-focused consumerism.

The black-focused films from the white-man perspective are marred with violence while African focus on black films presents the rich history of the continent from cultural to economic aspects. The perspective from the second argument disputed the fact that post-colonialism is all about the relationship between Africa and their former colonialists. Hence, the focus is on developing links based on unity and authentic African identity.

Most of the representations by Africans within African films are based on post-colonialism which basically explores the connections between African cultures and their history of colonial exploitation. The oppressions from the colonial masters resulted into rebellion as portrayed by African-produced films.

The overall analysis within these films seeks to explore the root of cultural and political forces affecting the continent amidst domination by western culture. Yeelen focuses on the rich African aspect based on modernity which provides great challenge on the former western perspective about Africa.

All post-colonial descriptions on Africa reveal the unequal and uneven representations of the cultural forces within the political and social sectors. Hence the overall facts given in the description of Africa and Africans based on post-colonial perspective can be considered strategic and true representation of contemporary African culture. In the previous review, Africa is considered passive participant in overall world development.

The continent is portrayed as the object of Western actions through colonialism while in the second perspective, in Yeelen, Xala and Touki-Bouki films, Africa is considered an active participant in contributing towards their own history (Murphy, 2000).

We will write a custom Essay on Africa in an African Perspective specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, the whole concept on wars in films can be traced back to the fact that western citizens, especially American citizens, had full obligation of arming themselves for the purposes of protecting families and their nation from foreign encroachments as well as domestic tyrants.

This is contrary to forms of military organization where professionally trained soldiers and officers are established and isolated from the society for the purposes of protecting entire nation. The whole perspective was injected into the African culture during colonialism.

However, the idea of allowing citizen-soldier establishment enabled direct involvement of the people’s will power in the preservation of liberties and rights within the society like in the case of Mau Mau.

Impact of these representations on personal view of Africa and Africans

From the perspective of the films, descriptions on Africa differ based on the region from which the description is made. Western perspective portrays Africa as a continent marred with inadequacies and violence. Africans represent race confronted with daunting ironies which can be traced back from unsettled paradigm shifts. Even after decolonization, the now independent Africa still wallow in poor economic performance.

However, there is profound dignity and richness within the African continent. This can be realized from the continent’s rich natural resource base. Statistics reveal that Africa alone produces 46% of world’s chromium, 48% diamonds and 29% gold.

The continent is portrayed as one with elaborate problems ranging from poor infrastructure, instability within governments, diseases and corruption. Africans are also portrayed as those over-relying on resources, since they focus on simple sale of natural resources instead of providing value-added services. This has made most of the countries within the continent to largely depend on aid from foreign countries.

They are portrayed as those with inability to create and restructure conditions for the benefit of the natives. Most of the films associate Africans with ghetto streets depicting where they focus their real lives (Murphy, 2000).

Africans have their rich practices such as circumcision which existed even before colonialism. However, the rich ethnic diversities the continent enjoys presents lots of threat since each ethnic background and country seems to hostile towards each other based on focus towards leadership and resource ownership.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Africa in an African Perspective by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More There is lack of brotherhood amongst Africans owing to conflicts based on selfish ambitions towards wealth. This has made it difficult the forging of a United States of Africa (Murphy, 2000).

References Mengara, D. (2001). Introduction: White Eyes, Dark Reflections in Images of Africa: Stereotypes and Realities. Trenton, NJ: Africa World Press, Inc.

Murphy, D. (2000). African Filming Africa: questioning Theories of an Authentic African Cinema. Journal of African Cultural Studies, 13 (2), 239-249.


Tourism and Environment in Conflict Research Paper scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

New experience-based product description

Customer segmentation and target markets

Competitor Analysis

Communication and promotion strategies


Works Cited

Introduction Tourism is affected by the environment of the destination country, in terms of climatic conditions and culture. Before deciding on the destination, tourists evaluate the suitability of the destination in terms of culture and weather conditions. Tourists are more likely to visit a destination with a new experience and a similar or familiar environment.

This paper seeks to highlight how to develop a suitable tourism product that would attract tourists originating from a specific country. In essence, this paper will focus on simulating the environment of the country of origin. By creating a similar culture to the country of origin, the conflict between tourism and environment will be eliminated.

This paper will be written as a new product development plan. Product development is a prerequisite for satisfying tourist’s changing demands and ensuring the long-term profitability of the industry (Smith 582).

By developing a new experience-based product within the tourism and hospitality industry, it will benefit the diverse consumers, and provide them with a product that satisfies the needs of multiple market segments.

As a result, phenomenal profit will be generated (Kim 1002). The experience-based product will attempt to simulate the environment that the tourists are used to; this will make them comfortable in the new environment away from their origin.

The developed product will be discussed followed by the products attributes functions, features and benefits. The consumer’s market segments will also be discussed along with an analysis on the competitors’ market. The product’s communication and promotion strategies will be explored so that the product can successfully eliminate the conflict between tourism and environment.

Hospitality and tourism organizations have always been on the frontline of the global economy. These organizations are in the business of providing leisure and personal services to local and international clients.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The market in hospitality industry is derived from personal and business travels, events and educational travels. Tourism is a special sector in hospitality industry. The main players in this sector include hotel and restaurants operators, tourist operators, transporters, event’s organizers and cultural services (Smith 582).

New experience-based product description The term “product” refers to the conceptual commodity produced by an industry (Smith 582). The newly developed experience-based product is a cultural-inspired resort in the destination country. The objective is to provide a home experience to tourists at an affordable price whilst giving them the cultural values and experience of their country of origin.

The cultural-inspired resort will contain the authenticity of culture, as though the tourists are visiting their country of origin. Staff members will be from country of origin, enhancing the feeling of being located in the country.

There will be authentic rituals performed several times a day; the country of origin language will be commonly spoken among staff members and to consumers at this resort. Of course, there will be an influx of nothing but food, drinks and activities from the country of origin.

Customer segmentation and target markets O’Meara (1) asserts that an effective customer segmentation approach must match the products demand and behaviour in a predictive manner. The approach must be marketed to make sense to the targeted group and therefore it will reach the identified target successfully (Dalton 1).

Cooil (9) explains that customer segmentation is aimed at guiding firms and companies towards the most effective way to market their products and to develop new products. The cultural-inspired resort in the destination country will have a significant clientele that is worth concentrating commercial efforts.

The customers will be both domestic and international tourists. The resort will specifically attract people in all age brackets, with and without citizenship from the country of origin.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Tourism and Environment in Conflict specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Anticipated customers for the cultural-inspired resort will be divided into several segments with similar needs or service requirements. These segments will have common characteristics and will exhibit similar reactions to marketing and promotions.

Dividing the anticipated clientele for the cultural-inspired resort will leverage limited resources; this means that the essentials of the promotion mix and advertising will be designed to satisfy specific requirements of different clients groups (Baines and Fill 218).

Customers for the new cultural-inspired resort will be segmented based on demographic information. These include variables such as their gender, occupation, education level, religion, income and social class. This information will give the management an overview of financial capability of their clients.

Another segment will be life-stage based on the fact that different ages of people have different needs. Consequently, financial capability is most likely going to be determined by the age of a person (Baines and Fill 218). Another segment will be based on geographic factors; this follows that the resort expects to get local clients as well as tourists from the country of origin.

After customer segmentation, the resort will determine whether any of the segmented market should be targeted and made the center of an inclusive marketing program. Eventually, the resort will choose the market segments to be exploited and the ones to be ignored; in essence this is the ones to be exploited will be the target markets.

The resort will choose markets which are accessible or where customers are reachable through promotion and advertisements on media. Cultural-inspired resort will also target measurable markets; the ones that will be easily identified and analyzed.

The resort will target middle aged people who have a keen interest in following the new trends and who can be easily accessed through the media. The clientele will be those who have attained eighteen years and above due to their financial security (Baines and Fill 218).

Competitor Analysis Ghosh and Morita (139) observe that competitors of a product of similar nature often collaborate by sharing an element of their value-creating activity or product design. However, the cultural-inspired resort still has its product differentiation as it will provide different services compared to any other bed and breakfast resort within the destination country; it will have a huge emphasis on marketing this product to the consumer.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Tourism and Environment in Conflict by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More If the resort is threatened by another competitor in future, the management may decide to collaborate and work together with the competitor. The two may form a joint company characterized by product distinctiveness of the cultural-inspired resort and the competitor’s beach side resort; the consumers would see distinctiveness between the products.

Competitor analysis of the cultural-inspired resort gives more insight into the strategies of the competitor. The analysis will help the resort to view the trends and future of the hospitality industry in the destination country. The first step is to identify the competitors; these are other beachside resorts and bed and breakfast getaways.

The strategies used by these competitors will be identified to provide the true picture of current trends in the hospitality industry and the general market place. The resort will use the analysis of these strategies to design its own unique strategies to confront the market (Stralser 164).

Communication and promotion strategies As expressed by Abdalnaser (1684), the basic objective of promotion is to be able to communicate information and properly inform the consumers of the product. The communication should be carried out in the most effective way for consumers to identify the product by connecting images and catchy slogans of the promotion.

The cultural-inspired resort will inform, persuade and influence its prospective customers. The strategies will be aimed at making the tourists to selectively come to the resort. The promotional mix that the resort will use includes service promotion, advertising and public relations (Scrib Inc 2).

Cellich and Borgeon (37) discuss promotional strategies as being based on a continuous process involving the design of a product, monitoring, evaluation and feedback. The cultural-inspired resort will have to continuously update and maintain their design, making sure the theme is successfully carried through.

This will be closely monitored by managers and consumers. Along with feedback from customers, this will provide additional evaluation. The objective of promotional strategy will be to capture a new market, keep the market and expand the market (Scrib Inc 2).

People often impulse buy a holiday and destination when an urge for a holiday strike them. Liao (3) states that, it is communication and consumer characteristics that promote impulse buying, along with motivation and product appeal. The resort will continue to maintain a good reputation.

It will have everything, a relaxing holiday and plenty to do if need be. This will all be in a setting that feels like the consumer has escaped the country of origin, and entered an entirely different and authentic country, all at a reasonable cost.

Cultural-inspired resort will use the promotional strategy to differentiate its products and service from those of competitors. The resort will apply the concept of positioning to communicate the distinctions of its products and services. These distinctions will be based on price, quality and uniqueness.

The objectives of the promotional strategy will to increase clientele or the number of tourists who will use the resort as their destination. The resort will attract and keep business and recreational travellers by offering weekend packages by lowering the rates (Scrib Inc 5).

Cultural-inspired resort promotional strategy will emphasize on advertising to reach more tourists both local and international. The advertisements will be institutional or corporate in type; the resort will promote its values, ideas and concepts.

During the initial stages of the resort, the advertisements will be mainly informative to build initial demand for the resort. Afterwards, the advertisements will be persuasive to advance the competitive status of cultural-inspired resort (Scrib Inc 10).

Conclusion It is evident that hospitality and tourism organizations have always been on the frontline of world’s economy. These organizations are in the business of providing leisure and personal services to local and international customers.

The newly developed experience-based cultural-inspired resort in the destination country will provide a unique environment for its local and overseas clients. The environment will be similar to home environment to offer “a home away from home” experience. This will eliminate the conflict between the tourism and environment in the destination country.

Works Cited Abdalnaser, Ahmad, et al. “Promotion Objectives, Strategies and Tools.” Interdisciplinary Journal of Contemporary Research in Business (2011): 1682-1994. Print.

Baines, Paul and Chris Fill. Marketing. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, 2011. Print.

Cellich, Claude and Michael Borgeon. Trade Promotion Strategies. New York: Electronic Book, 2012. Print.

Dalton, Patrick. “Customer Segmentation.” ABA Bankers News (2006): 14(9),1-2.

Ghosh, Alex and Morita. “Competitor collaboration and product distinctiveness.” International Journal of Industrial Organization (2012): 30(2),137-152. Print.

Kim,Wong. “Product Variety Strategy for Improving New Product Development Proficiencies.” Technovation (2005): 25(9),1001-1015. Print.

Liao, Sen. “The effects of sales promotion strategie, product appeal and consumer traits on reminder impulse buying behaviour.” International Journal of Consumer Studies (2009): 33 (3),1-11. Print.

Scrib Inc. Product Promotional Strategy. 16 July 2012. Web.

Smith, Stephen. “The Tourism Product.” Annals of Tourism Research (1994): 582-595. Print.

Stralser, Steven. MBA In A Day: What You Would Learn At Top-Tier Business Schools (If You Only Had The Time!). Hoboken, New Jersey: John Wiley


The Communist Party in Russia Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Abstract



Brief Historical Overview

Reemergence of the Communist Party

Party Support


Future of the Communist Party

Discussion and Conclusion

Works Cited

Abstract This research paper considers the development of the Communist Party of Russia (CPRF) over the last two decades. It begins by providing a historical context surrounding the formation of the party in 1993. The paper notes how the CPRF emerged as the successor to the Communist Part of the Soviet Union. A review of the first years of the party and its success at the electoral system is given.

The paper traces the party support over the years and notes that the party made some ideological changes in order to adapt to the new political system. The paper notes that the economy has played a significant role in Communist politics with Communist candidates exploiting the poor economic state of the country to make electoral gains. However, this tact will be unsustainable as Russia’s economy grows.

It reveals that in spite of the party’s poor performance in the previous elections, it is still the most organized party in Russia and the most vocal opposition party. The paper concludes by stating that the Communist party will continue to be a key player in Russian politics at least for the next decade.

Outline Introduction

The Communist Party which ruled Russia for much of the 20th century experienced a collapse in the late 1980s following the end of the Cold war. However, the party has been demonstrating growth since the 1990s due to its ability to adapt itself therefore remaining relevant in the Russian political scene.

Brief Historical Overview

The collapse of the Soviet Union initiated the decline of the Communist party with the decline reaching an ultimate following the outlawing of the party by Boris Yeltsin.

Reemergence of the Communist Party

A number of factors are to be credited with the re-emergence of the communist Party in post-Soviet Russia. The factors are: the suffering of Russians in the early post-Soviet era, the forging of alliances among various communist contendors, and the inherited institutional legacy from the Soviet era Communist Party.

Party Support

The CPRF has exhibited support from different quotas in its 2 decade existence. The older generation made up the support base in the parties early years. Citizens with nationalistic sentiments also support the party. Currently, support for the party is based upon ideological values by the members.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Ideology

The post Soviet-Era communist party evolved from a Marxism-Leninism ideology to a West European form of social democracy. The party styles itself as a party of patriots dedicated to defending Russian statehood.

Future of the Communist Party

The CPRF has experienced a decrease in influence, a situation accentuated by the sizable losses in votes and parliamentary seats in the 2003 elections. However, the party is still the second-largest electoral party. The good organization of the Communit party is its strong point and it continues to be the main challenger to government policies.

Discussion and Conclusion

The importance of the Communist Party of the Russian Federation has changed over the years and it has lost many voters over. However, it will remain to be a significant participant in Russian politics.

Introduction The collapse of the Soviet Union and the subsequent end of Communist rule in much of Eastern Europe was arguably the most significant political event of the late 20th century. This event led to Russia being transformed from a communist one-party state into a multiparty democracy.

The once dominant Communist Party of Russia suffered a massive dismemberment and went on to be banned from participation in post-Soviet political life (Flikke 275). While most people would have expected this to be the end the Communist Party, it experienced some revival during the 1990s.

The party was able to return to politics thanks to the efforts of dedicated professionals who created a nationalist version of the party. The party has been able to adapt itself to a changed political environment and make a strong showing in the State Duma elections over the decades. This paper will set out to offer a detailed review of the Communist Party in Russia.

Brief Historical Overview The powerful Communist Party of the Soviet Union began its decline following the appointment of Mikhail Gorbachev as the first secretary of the party. He was charged with the task of reforming the party and the reform programs he proposed led to a division of the party. While some members demanded for greater reforms, others resisted these changes, which were perceived to weaken the party.

We will write a custom Essay on The Communist Party in Russia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The final blow occurred in March 1990 when the constitutional Act that guaranteed the party’s political monopoly was repealed. Hard-line party leaders and some military officials tried to launch a coup in August hoping to stop this transformation process.

This August Coup failed and in the backlash against the plotters, the Russian President Boris Yeltsin outlawed the party and confiscated its property (Borrero 119). The post-Soviet Russia therefore emerged as a country free of the Communist Party.

Reemergence of the Communist Party The communist Party reemerged from its illegal status in post-Soviet Russia as the Communist Party of the Russian Federation (CPRF). Under the leadership of Gennadi Zyuganov, this party styled itself as a reformed party that would end the suffering that ordinary Russians were experiencing in the post-Soviet period. Zyuganov’s party declared itself the successor to the Communist Party of the Soviet Union (CPSU).

However, this was not the only party to issue such a declaration and Pasynkova documents that a number of communist parties emerged and declared themselves as successors of the CPSU (240). Zyuganov was concerned about this disunity and his party welcomed membership from the multiple successor communist parties in Russia.

Unity among the various communist contenders in these early stages was critical to the success of the CPRF. Zyuganov therefore introduced the dual chairmanship model of political organization that softened internal tensions among the communist contenders and preserved a unity that was based on the rejection of a common enemy (Flikke 278).

The party adopted an “us” against “them” political rhetoric with the party presenting itself as patriots and defenders of a sovereign Russia while the government was presented as enemies of the Russian Empire.

The CPRF quickly took on the role of the opposition and even went on to dub itself the “Russian resistance”. Many people who were opposed to the new government aligned themselves with this opposition force therefore strengthening the power of the party.

The party inherited an institutional legacy following the collapse of the ruling communist party and it was able to consider itself a “successor party”. Pasynkova notes that these new communist party inherited much of the leadership and membership resources of the former ruling party (238).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Communist Party in Russia by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The public was therefore able to recognize CPRF as the legitimate heir of the communist party. Even so, this new Communist party took great care to avoid being directly associated with the old Communist of the Soviet era since the old party had been blamed for the hardships suffered by many Russians.

In 1994, the government attempted to woo the CPRF leadership to work together with it. These attempts were met with opposition by the CPRF, which protested against the government’s attempt to swaddle it.

In its first participation in the multiparty system, the CPRF gained 12 % of the votes and 45 seats in the State Duma (lower house of the Federal Assembly). This modest victory showed that the communist party still had a following in Russia.

The electoral success of the CPRF in the 1993 Duma Election reinforced its position as the favored successor of the CPSU. The 1995 elections remain to be the most successful for the Communist party. These parliamentary elections held in December 1995 saw the CPRF gain 157 seats in the State Duma and garner 22% of the votes.

Since the Communist party controlled over a third of the seats in the Duma, it was able to influence the president in 1996 to change his pro-Western foreign policy to a Pragmatic Neo-Eurasianist one (Szaszdi 12).

Party Support In its early years, the party membership overwhelmingly consisted of the older generation. Tsipko states that the pensioners in Russia had suffered the most damage from the new system which had seen them lose the social guarantees that the former social system had assured them of (85).

This segment of the public wanted a return of a communist form of government that would return social guarantees and security to the country. The economically disadvantaged members of the society also voted for the communist party which was critical of the new economic order proposed by the government.

Backes and Moreau illustrate that in this period, the standard of living and especially the amount of income correlated with voting for CPRF (457).

The party is also favored by the segment of the population that wises to see the country restored to its place as a world power. The CPRF holds strong anti-Western sentiments and it views the US as a major adversary of the country. The anti-Western stance taken by the Communist party can be seen by the statement of the party’s Leader Zyuganov who claimed, “The US harbors the aim of weakening and dominating Russia” (Szaszdi 12).

Support for the Communist Party in Russia today is not an outcome of social alienation. Instead, most of the support is based upon ideological values of the members who believe that the socialism Nation envisioned by the party is the best for the country. The communist party’s base is made up of engineers, technicians, clerical works and teachers.

Backes and Moreau note that 33% of the people in this group are the older population aged 60 and above while the remaining portion is 45 years and older (459). Following the steady decline of the party’s membership, the CPRF has changed its approach and is not targeting younger voters.

Backes and Moreau note that CPRF’s efforts at recruiting young voters have been unsuccessful since this group prefers the radical leftist organizations such as the Avant-Garde and the National Bolshevik Party (459). Nevertheless, the CPRF has managed to strengthen its position in recent years with its increased nationalist positions.

Ideology Pasynkova asserts that the success of the Communist party in the post-communist era of Russia can be attributed to the transformations that the party has made in its organizational and ideological principles (237).

While still ascribing to the Marxism-Leninism ideology, the party has evolved significantly from the old Communist Party of the Soviet Union. The party has adopted a West European form of social democracy which supports private equity while at the same time promoting socialism in the country.

The party has been able to mold itself a popular identity as a party of patriots who are dedicated to defending Russian statehood through opposition to the president and the traitorous government (Flikke 274).

True to its ideals, the Communist Party has managed to resist government control and it is the most independent party in a Russia where the president has greater political power than the legislative branches.

Flikke notes that even with the less than a 200,000, the CPRF is the only party in Russia worth of the title “mass party” (274). The CPRF endeavored to perpetuate most of the communist values that the Russians had grown accustomed to.

The party makes use of the ideological propaganda and popular mobilization to gather up its support base especially in times of election. The party also encourages individual dedication to its cause the individual members are the major means through which party values and ideals are spread to the general population.

The CPRF has set itself apart as an anti-reformist and anti-system party calling for a new constitution and a change to the existing political regime. Pasynkova points to the contradictory messages of the party, which declares that it accepts the democratic values and the constitutional rule of law in Russia (242).

However, the CPRF exhibits some major differences from the old communist party of Russia. The party strongly rejects “careerism” which was a core component of old communism. Careerism led to members blindly following the party rule in the hope of moving up the party hierarchy because of their dedication and apparatchik mentality (Flikke 278).

The Communist Party of Russia falls under the programme type of party. A programme party is one which “prefers candidates defending their ideological principles resulting in the highest degree of ideological coherence of their members” (Pasynkova 241).

The CPRF has ideological unity and strong devotion of its members. As a communist party, the CPRF is ideologically opposed to democracy as advanced by the capitalistic West. However, the party has not maintained a rigid ideological stand and it has been able to adapt itself to the new political system.

The party has therefore resisted some democratic reforms while at the same time adapting them successfully in order to act as a democratic party in the post-communist Russian political environment.

Future of the Communist Party The CPRF’s influence has steadily decreased under Putin’s rule. However, the party has managed to remain in action unlike the small Communist party, which have been completely marginalized due to institutional changes such as the abolishment of the governor elections and the increasing role of the United Russia party (Backes and Moreau 458).

The decline in support for the communist party was made evident in the 2003 parliamentary elections where the party performed dismally. Many observers saw this poor performance as a beginning of the long awaited decline of the party.

Clark documents that in this election, the party suffered sizable losses in votes and parliamentary seats by the party obtaining 51 seats; a figure that was 62 seats lower than the previous elections in 1999 (15).

Amazingly, the party was still able to maintain its status as the country’s second-largest electoral party. Even so, questions began to be raised concerning the future of the party which had been facing declining support over the years.

In its early years, the CPRF heavily criticized the government’s economic program and the communist vote depended very heavily on the state of the economy. Russia’s economic growth and development over the last decade have therefore decreased support for the communist party.

The party chairman Zyuganov promoted the idea that the market based economy was faulty and that it should be abandoned by Russia and a move towards communism encouraged. Since 1999, the Russian economy has performed better and voter support for the CPRF has receded significantly during this period.

Clark asserts that if the claim that improvements in the performance of the economy threaten the electoral position enjoyed by the CPRF is true, then the party should consider a different approach to ensure future voter support (24). If the party fails to do this, it might loss its prominence and become an insignificant player in Russia’s political arena.

In spite of all these bleak prospects for the party, it is still one of the best organized in the Russian political sphere.

Johari points out that while Russia is a multi-party system with a dozen parties taking part in the presidential and parliamentary elections, most parties are known by the name of their supreme leaders underscoring the fact that they are not formed on the basis of some clear-out programme but on the personality of a leader (411).

Ethridge and Howard proceed to articulate that the problem with Russia is that it lacks a competitive party system because of the many parties in place which make it difficult for any party to achieve a workable majority in the national Parliament (385).

The Communist Party of Russia is the only party with an ideology of its own. The more than 20 parties and blocks operating in Russia are disorganized and indiscipline. Fluid parties and electoral coalitions characterize the Russian political scene.

Johari asserts that parties and blocs frequently splinter, join with others, and rename themselves which makes it hard for the public to hold politicians the parties accountable or even know whom to vote for or against (411). The communist party is also the only party that challenges the government on its policies.

Ethridge and Howard note that since the last election in 2007, the only opposition to the president has come from the Communist Party (385). This party is in fact the only one that speaks out against the government’s authoritarian behavior.

The party has made significant gains since 2003; acquiring 57 and 92 seats in the 2007 and 2011 parliamentary elections respectively. More significantly, the party’s support in all electoral districts has exhibited a steady increase.

The Russian democratic system is not yet mature and the major parties will play a significant role in the country’s future. Oversloot and Verheul assert that at the moment, Russia is not yet a true multi-party system and major parties are needed to overhaul the system.

The communist party will therefore play a significant role in Russian electoral politics as one of the more mature and well-organized parties in the country.

Discussion and Conclusion While the days when the communist Party of Russia was the state are gone, the party still has a major influence as the leading opposition party in Russia. The CPRF was able to keep the identity of the old soviet era party in order to maintain the support inherited from the CPSU and later on change its identity in order to acquire members from a wider spectrum of the Russian population.

The party has managed to shape the political environment in Russia and it is today the most significant opposition force. Owing to the significant electoral success achieved by the CPRF in the post-Soviet period, the party was able to prove its status as a formidable force in Russian politics that had been able to properly adapt to the new political realities.

Even in the face of failure in the 2003 parliamentary elections, the CPRF still remained one of the leading political parties in Russia. The Communist Party has managed to garner wider appeal across regional and socioeconomic boundaries. This is a significant achievement in a Russia where strong parties are non-existent as the party is centered on a single individual and in many cases, has regional limitations.

The paper set out to provide a detailed discussion of the extraordinary revival of the Communist Party in post-Soviet Russia. It has highlighted the revival of the Communist Party following its banishment in 1991. The paper has documented how the party used the tools of state patriotism and broad opposition to gain popularity against the Yeltsin regime.

It has then discussed the political fortunes of the party in the last decade in order to highlight the weakening of the party as it has lost voters. While the possibility of the Communist Party taking power in Russia is currently doubtful, the Communist Party of the Russian Federation will continue to be a significant participant in the Russian political arena.

Works Cited Backes, Uwe, and P. Moreau. Communist and Post-Communist Parties in Europe. Moscow: Vandenhoeck


Instructions Locate an article in the CSU Online Library that focuses on managing conflict in an organization through communication. The article must be clearly related to the course content and have essay help site:edu

The article must be clearly related to the course content and have the potential to contribute significant analysis and substantial engagement with the course topic.For this assignment, you will need to accurately identify the article’s premise, significant points in support of the premise, and the significance of those points to the course and/or the field. You need to present an insightful and thorough analysis of the article with strong arguments and evidence. Your interpretation will need to be both reasonable and compelling. You will need to apply course concepts in your analysis.As you write the review, be certain to analyze the type of conflict discussed in the article. 
Use the classifications discussed in the Unit III Lesson (Rahim’s functional outcomes and Rahim’s dysfunctional outcomes) in your analysis. Be certain to suggest communication techniques to manage functional conflict or, alternately, communication techniques to resolve dysfunctional conflict.Along with the article being reviewed, you will need to reference at least two peer-reviewed sources. Use the standard five-paragraph format (introduction/body/conclusion). APA format should be used. The critical review should be a minimum of two pages in length. Content, organization, and grammar/mechanics will be evaluated.


City of Cleveland Term Paper college essay help: college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Problems in this city


Government policies


References List

Introduction Carey (2010) describes Cleveland as a city in the United States of America at the Ohio state. It has the highest population compared to all other states. Cleveland city is located on the Northeastern side of Ohio, and on the south of Lake Erie. This city is bordered by the Pennsylvania.

The economy of this city is of a diversified nature. The key economic sectors include manufacturing, financial sector services, health sector and medicals. Its’ estimated to have a population of more than 396,815 thus making it to be ranked number forty five in America. The largest population of this city consists of the locals who are known as Clevenders.

Problems in this city There are many problems facing this city which have been known for a long period. The city is known for defaulting debts because of depression that has hit the city in the recent past. In some instances, it was ranked as one of the miserable cities in America.

The city has been greatly mentioned for its high unemployment rate, high rate of taxes, extreme weather conditions, and grand corruption by many government officials (Carey, 2010). It also has very weak sports teams. Most of these problems have been increasing in the past years. In addition, people have been moving to urban centers at a high rate.

Contaminated land also poses as a major problem in the city. Other serious problems that have been experienced are foreclosures and bankruptcy filings in the law courts. On the hand, the ever increasing housing prices continued to aggravate the situation.

In fact, the rate of unemployment and inflation in the year 2009 was 12.7% as indicated by annual statistics. Pollution problems are also experienced in this city. Corruption is evidenced by the number of convictions witnessed in this city. Good evidence on the rate of crime is shown by statistics (Carey, 2010).

According to Carey (2010), 309 public officials have been convicted of bribery related charges according to the judicial records. There is also abandonment of homes in this city although there is an improvement in this situation. The relevant authorities have been trying to develop ways of reducing the problem of housing in this city.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nevertheless, there are some major achievements that have been made. For example, there are three sports venues in Ohio that are classified as the best the city. Another main achievement is the construction of Cleveland clinic, which is considered to be the largest medical center in the country. It is the largest employer in Ohio. The rate of violent crimes is another serious problem that is experienced in this city.

There has been an increase in the number of convicts because of participation in violent crimes. The state of education in this city is terrible. The public schools in this city are failing to prepare the young students for their future. This has made children and parents to flee from the suburbs of the city (Restoring Prosperity, 2010). They move to the cities to look for security and quiet environment.

The leaders of this city have to be actively involved in dealing with these problems. They have to participate aggressively in the process of eradicating the problems through the use of preventive and corrective measures. When vying for civic seats in the city, there are some key things that need to be implemented to improve the condition.

There is a need for Cleveland city to be developed and planned in order to ensure the challenges are countered. Planning will entail developing a framework that will help in addressing these challenges. The plan should include location of retail businesses and their operations at strategic places. This will ensure better use of industrial and commercial land, as well as the development of residential areas (Carey and Gillespie, 2010).

In addition, it will encourage the development of design issues in the city. Physical development will be an integral part of the plan, and will ensure Cleveland becomes a lively city. The social need can be addressed by architects and planners who are mandated to develop a good planning system. This will be done by creating these industries through the national laboratory (Restoring Prosperity, 2010).

The self organized group of manufactures should be given grants by city authorities. This will be done at the national or regional levels. The established Manufacturing Extension Program (MEP) will be expanded, and get supported fully by the authorities.

The government will put in place research and development in order to ensure the right technology is adopted and that there are improvements in the production of green products. As a leader, I will ensure there is great promotion of green oriented sources of energy. There will be support of the services export industry through the global export.

We will write a custom Term Paper on City of Cleveland specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This will be done through expanding the presence of the services globally as well as the attraction of the talents globally. There will be support of the community to translate to entrepreneurs and help them develop into entrepreneurs. According to Restoring Prosperity (2010), this will be done by providing training and supporting them, the existing companies will be helped to develop new products lines and provision of capital.

There will be better land reconfiguration as well as the right sizing of the land. There will also be strategies to help establish better reconfiguration and repurposing of land. Processes to ensure better use of water and clean up efforts will be put in place. This will ensure reduced water pollution.

There is also a need for the reformation of its K-12 education system. This will ensure they compete with other forms of education systems in this country. It will also enhance competitiveness (Carey and Gillespie, 2010).

The policies are not necessarily the one which will benefit the residents of Cleveland city only. In short, some will help the residents of this city while others will cut across in the whole state as well as the country. One of the Examples is the policy to reduce water pollution is the policy on the land use. The use of new land bank law will apply to every county in this state.

This law will recognize the long term challenges that fit the local land market. The establishment of new state planning processes will allow new types of land uses. This will not only be useful to the dwellers of the city but to all people including those in surrounding areas (Carey and Gillespie, 2010).

The introduction and support of competitive infrastructure agenda will not only help the people of this city but all the people of the entire country. This policy will be taken in collaboration with the states and federal authorities. Established fright and rail industry will develop a good transportation plan that will ensure easier movement of goods across the Great Lakes region.

It will also simplify the movement of goods across the US-Canadian border. The process of shifting K-12 dollars to classrooms will be beneficial to many people. The larger Ohio was ranked forty seven in terms of secondary education. There will be a school district consolidation which will ensure more aggressive shared services, not between the locals but to all the people of the surrounding areas.

It will not for the benefit of Ohio’s localities but also to the state government. This will be achieved through the establishment of multiple programs and delivery systems. The policies on building of the workforce and infrastructure will not only help the neighborhood but also will immensely help the residents of Cleveland.

Not sure if you can write a paper on City of Cleveland by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It will help the residents move from the low income earning position to middle class earning class. Provision of funds to the people by the federal government will greatly help the residents of Cleveland city together with the economy of the country. The process of educating the people of this area which is being done through peer-to-peer workshop will help them learn the skills of becoming entrepreneurs.

This is being enhanced by the local organizations and leaders. These summits will equipped the locals with the knowledge on better utilization of the funds available for their utilization in running and expanding businesses. It has also resulted to reduced unemployment rates (Carey, 2010).

Incentives The City of Cleveland is relatively invested in bringing residents into the City limits to work and play. In an attempt to help neighborhoods suggest a greater variety of affordable, updated housing stock, the city has put together an incentive plan to make buying a house in Cleveland a very attractive opportunity (Gillespie, 2010). The main element of the incentive package is tax abatement.

Tax abatement is the short-term elimination of bigger real estate taxes for prospective and existing developers and homeowners. Tax abatement is open as a way of inspiring new expansion and redevelopment, and it is running to bring new inhabitants into new life and Cleveland neighborhoods (Mallach and Brachman, 2010).

These need qualifications for a new building of single-family homes, new structure of multifamily investor owned properties, conversion of nonresidential buildings to residential units, rehabilitation of multifamily houses. The City of Cleveland offers housing tax abatement on recently constructed and reformed homes throughout its thirty six neighborhoods.

Currently, a newly constructed home in Cleveland receives 100%, fifteen year tax abatement for construction of the residence, but owners are still responsible for the raise in value of the land. Rehabilitated properties receive a 100 %; ten year abatement on the increased value of their possessions after the work has been completed.

In the year 2009, all projects seeking public subsidy and incentives shall meet the necessities set forth by the Cleveland Green Standard. At the start of year 2010, to be eligible for housing tax abatement in Cleveland’s CRA program, all new structure and projects will need to meet Energy Star Standards.

Other Incentives include land bank lots incentives which involve buildable lots to be available at low-priced prices, which currently average $100, from the City of Cleveland (Mallach and Brachman, 2010). The second mortgage assistance incentives, whereby the City of Cleveland funds a second mortgage overdue loan program for new houses.

This program offers a maximum of $10,000 in the term of a deferred mortgage that assist at a fair cost. The loan is made at a zero percent interest rate for thirty year tenure. The loan is payable and due to the City upon the rent, sale, transfer, termination of occupancy, or refinance of the mortgaged assets during the loan period.

Another incentive is mortgage financing options which involves several financial agencies that lend in the City of Cleveland towards home ownership. According to Gillespie (2010), incentives range from no to low deposit necessities, short interest rates, and cheap closing costs.

In addition, home repair programs incentives in the City of Cleveland and various nonprofit organizations offer low-interest home refurbish and improvement loans to help Cleveland people. Interest rates range from 0-6%, with many programs having no proceeds margins (Reviving cities, 1996).

There are also business incentives whereby the Cleveland department of planning and development works with expanding city businesses to encourage their growth and expansion. Some of the programs offered by the City include Community Reinvestment Area Program. The City of Cleveland has four Community Reinvestment areas located in the Office, Commerce and Technology District.

The City has created several taxes increasing financing Districts as economic expansion gear that allow the City to pay back the debt for infrastructure improvements. Cleveland will employ specialist to appraise the City’s zoning system and other rules to remove barriers and support environmental practices in land expansion and house construction.

The appraise process will include a plan to engage the community (Restoring Prosperity, 2010). The whole objectives of the sustainability appraisal will include lessening water consumption, reducing unyielding surfaces, growing tree and vegetation coverage, rising biodiversity, decreasing landfill dumping and encouraging power effectiveness and good modes of transportation.

Consultants will review common zoning requirements as well as specific requirements for large-scale developments.

The city staff and a consultant will carry an extensive development process to develop planned expansion to incorporate sustainable payback; persuade energy efficient buildings, protection easements, modern water management, municipal infrastructure improvements, public open places, civic plazas, accessible compliant units, and proper solar direction (Restoring Prosperity, 2010).

The residential districts will be at better lot exposure to reduce impermeable surface, and decrease parking necessities. Business districts will encourage pedestrian oriented, solid design, transparency along lane frontages, bicycle way in and storage, connections to nearby areas, high quality, sustainable structure materials, and proper landscape.

The accessory structures and uses will give confidence alternative energy production, water and energy efficiency, and local food production (Restoring Prosperity, 2010). Adjusting of the parking standards will be done to include the maximum number of parking places (Reviving cities,1996).

The landscape and water preservation will cater for minimum installation sizes for all plant types, allow for naturalized lawns, native landscapes and gardens, species diversity requirement, require native plant species, establish recommended and prohibited plant lists. The region will maintain investments in its anchor institutions like Ohio University.

This will be a source of technical assistance and a higher education for the Ohio community. The community will engage in economic activities in order to attract outside investors. Provision of investment opportunities and location incentives in Ohio will enhance its transformation to a new economy (Carey and Gillespie 2010).

Government policies The objective of these efforts is to enlarge economic prosperity through job creation and better way in to job and business tenure by all sections of the Cleveland community. The Connecting Cleveland 2020 Plan consequently puts onward a complete set of cost-effective development policies (Restoring Prosperity, 2010). These policies are focused on certain strategies.

The government capitalizes on the presence of well known medical and learning institutions to produce businesses concerned in health care measures and products. At the same time they attract patients and guests from outside the city. For instance, develop health industries teaching program to advance the fit between this business and the skills of Clevelanders (Mallach and Brachman, 2010).

The government needs to support product design, product originality and productivity procedure improvements to assist industry move from customary production to higher value and focused output in sectors where Cleveland can build viable advantages. For example, promote the renewal of the most appropriate existing construction supply for modern manufacturing uses.

The government needs to make stronger the facilities, attractions, businesses and housing surroundings in the central city and its business district as a basis for area economic expansion. An example is like capitalizing on Cleveland’s network and extra technology infrastructure. This will reinforce its responsibility as area technology center and replicate successes of know-how centers.

Strengthen municipal learning and access to enduring workforce education opportunities as a base for building a worldwide aggressive economy and private wealth for Cleveland people. The government should make sure that all Clevelanders have the chance to benefit from neighboring economic expansion activity (Gillespie, 2010). For instance, improve transport options for people to work places and focus efforts on locating businesses in neighboring cities with higher rates of joblessness.

This will involve seeking ways to improve the worth of property and buildings through recycle. Government should encourage the region’s wide range of industry assets in competing together to draw businesses from outside the local economy. Another policy is the use of public economic incentives.

The government should utilize the arts and literary gifts to draw highly able and expert to live and secure job in the Cleveland city (Reviving cities, 1996).

Conclusion The city of Cleveland is a famous city in America. However, there are numerous problems facing this city as discussed in the essay. There is a need to address these problems facing the city. The success in dealing with these problems will depend with the involvement of the local leaders and their commitments towards the laid down strategies.

The policies discussed above in dealing with the problem should be implemented (BIMPP, 2010). They should be aimed at substantially helping the residents of the city of Cleveland as well as the outsiders.

References List Carey, D. (2010). Reason Foundation, Reason Saves Cleveland with Drew Carey. Web.

Carey, D.


The Advancements of Airport Security since September 11, 2001 Essay college essay help: college essay help

Table of Contents Abstract


Advanced Passenger Screening

Airport security

Improved aircraft security

Improved Personal Identity Screening

Reference List

Abstract Poor security at the US airports was highly blamed following the twin attack of the September 11 2001 in the United States. Since then, the US government has invested heavily in security, particularly in the airports, in order to protect its citizens. There has been advancement in technology besides the extensive screening of passengers before they board the airplanes.

The airport security has been tightened using video surveillance and advanced data exchange technology. Besides, the aircraft security has also been advanced using bulletproof cockpit doors and restricted access to the airports. Advanced personal identity screening has been fine-tuned at the airport. The paper thus gives details of these advancements made in the US following the attack.

Introduction Since the September 11, 2001 terrorist attack in the United States, there has been a deliberate move by both the US and the federal governments to seal the loopholes that existed before in the airports sector. The 19 hijackers who terrorized the US in the twin attacks were able to go through the normal security checks and even shut the alarms of the metal detectors.

The hijackers forced the planes to fly into the World Trade Center and the Pentagon thus pushing thousands of people to respond to the attack. However, thousands died innocently portraying the fact that the United States airports were insecure.

The many questions raised concerning the incidence about safety of the US airports form the basis of this paper that discusses the advancement of airport security since September 11, 2001.

Advanced Passenger Screening The previous poor airport security in the US that led to the attacks was highly criticized by people like Saine who have declared the “transport security author as “too reactive, imposing screening procedures that respond to past terrorist plots and not doing enough to anticipate future threats” (2012, Para. 2).

As a result, the airports have adapted advanced screening devices that can screen any bomb materials and or even metals (Foster, 2011, Para. 3). Before the September 11, 2001 attack, passengers could not carry bottled water into the airport leave alone the airplanes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, the new technology has enabled them to do so comfortably. Computer companies like Siemens have played an important role in helping the airports install baggage screeners, which now allow the passengers to drop off any bag that they are carrying immediately they enter the airports.

The new luggage screening system has also speeded up the process of screening. For example, the Delta airline has been able to increase the number of luggage screened per hour from 200 to 500 (Saine, 2012, Para. 4).

The step that has resulted out of technology has also eased the previous congestion in the airport thus reducing the safety risks because the aircraft hijackers of September 11 were able to pass their luggage though security checks without raising any alarm. For example, they carried box cutters that they used in threatening other passengers

The government has also provided a good administration by investing heavily on the development of sophisticated sensors that have the ability to recognize dangerous persons like those who carry explosives in their clothes long before they get into the gates of the airports. The success of the fast advancement in the security management at the airports has been because of government funding.

Following the September 11 2001 incidence, the government dedicated huge sums of money for the US airport security, approximately 700% more than before. Other authorities have also taken part in the financial support, for instance, “the customs and border patrol unit of the U.S., the coast guard, and the authorities of the ports that are in charge of maintaining, managing, and even owning the airports” (Ziebauer et al., 2003, p. 5).

Airport security The US airports have also acquired advanced information technology devices that enable the police and special units that deal with border patrol to exchange data faster than they used to before the twin attacks. The step has been possible because only the agencies previously had common data banks that could share information.

However, the new technology has allowed the police units and airports authorities to exchange information freely and quickly even when they are using different databases. The security personnel employed in airports must pass through a vetting session for any criminal record.

We will write a custom Essay on The Advancements of Airport Security since September 11, 2001 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Before September 11, some airports had hired employees with criminal records. For example, according to Ziebauer et al. (2003, p.5), the Philadelphia International Airport had hired untrained security personnel with criminal records. This has really reduced the time taken for the security agents to identify the criminals with intentions of committing acts of terror.

Airports are also adopting the use of video surveillance gargets that enable monitors to supervise and detect abnormal behavior in crowds. The technology enabled the security agent to identify the person who was behind the bombing of the Times Square. This equipment was able to identify this bomber accurately amongst other people in a crowd.

The federal government planned and established the homeland security unit, which is consistently investigating terrorism attacks besides taking pre-emptive actions to prevent any act of terror in the U.S.

All the security persons must be trained on how to perform screenings since, during the September 11 attack, Khali al-Mihdhar, Nawaf-al-Hazmi, Majed Moqed, and even Salem al-Hazmi were able to set off all the metal detectors and their alarms at the security checks (Zielbauer


Employees’ Psychological Resistance Report essay help free

What is Employee Psychological Resistance to Change? Humans are creatures of habit in that they enjoy daily routines and standards of procedure that do not constantly change on a daily basis, it is only in instances that change is introduced that it is met with significant resistance due to the inherent desire to keep things as they were (Strebel 1996, pp. 86-92).

Such a case is often seen in various corporations wherein changes implemented by the company is often met with significant resistance due to the desire of employees to retain the operational procedures that they have grown accustomed to (Strebel 1996, pp. 86-92).

What you have to understand is that when employees are exposed to a particular procedural element for daily operations over an extended period of time they develop a certain sense of complacency in that they tend to prefer the current way of doing business.

Not only that, it is often the case that employees are often not informed as to why specific changes are occurring in the first place which results in them feeling threatened. The end result is that employees tend to associate change within the company as having the potential for them to lose their jobs as a direct result of the changes being implemented.

For example, it was noted by the study of Wu et al. (2012) that employees in certain companies tended to oppose certain degrees of automation involving internal operational processes due to the perception that such changes would eliminate the need for their job (Wu et al. 2012, pp.178-199 ).

Even if such changes would make their jobs easier changes within the company still continued to be met with significant degrees of skepticism and fear. It should also be noted that psychological resistance to change occurs not only in employees but in managers as well (Lloyd and Mey 2010, pp. 1-12). It is often the case that managers fear change due to the fact that they fear losing power over their employees.

Managers perceive change as a negatively impacting their autonomy over their work place environments and the various factors that they have control over. In fact, it is at times perceived as a direct attack on the managers themselves despite the fact that nothing could be farther from the truth. It should also be noted that managers resist such changes due to their perception that they may lose their jobs as a direct result.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What must be understood is that change often comes with the implementation of new practices that managers may or may not be able to sufficiently cope up with (Mittal 2012, pp. 64-71).

As such, those who are under the belief that they would be unable to adapt to the new changes are the most resistant to them being implemented since it would be likely that they would be replaced by another person that has the necessary capacity to implement the changes as need be.

It should also be noted that managers often suffer from the same perception regarding complacency and, as a result, are often skeptical when changes are implemented within the company. They often view such changes as completely unnecessary with the potential of negatively impact the status quo within the office.

Manifestation of Employee Resistance to Change Passive Resistance

One the most common manifestations of the resistance of employees to change comes in the form of passive resistance. This particular aspect of employee resistance takes the form of general negative opinions and feelings regarding the changes being implemented within the company (Koen and Maaike 2011, 284-305).

One of the most noticeable impacts of this particular resistance to change manifests itself through employee performance in the workplace. It is often the case that individuals who are resistant to change within certain organizations often develop a distinct aversion towards working in such an environment which impacts their productivity at work.

Based on the study of Oreg


An Aspect of Politics and Culture of Meiji in Japan Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Japan’s early civilization was shaped by the emergence of the Meiji era. The Meiji era started after Tokugawa Shogunate had deformed. This led to Japan’s conversion into a contemporary developed state.

The Meiji era started as a coalition involving Choshu and Satsuma known as the Satcho rebellion and was formed in 1866 (Ebley, Anne and Palais 112). The Satcho rebellion was the one accountable for conquering Tokugawa Shogunate.

The samurai’s in Japan were estimated to be 1.9 million in numbers. The government experienced a huge burden because of the stipends that were paid to the samurai. A planned course of action by the oligarchs was implemented to get rid of the samurai. They had to pay taxes on their stipends and urged to change them into government bonds.

The samurai had a privilege of bearing arms and when the government mandated every male of 21 years must pass through the army, everyone could now bear arms. This led to riots by the samurai and later on to a civil war, which was settled down by the army (Ebley, Anne and Palais 118).

The status of the samurai was abolished after this, many joined the new society and became military officers, and teachers since they were knowledgeable.

In the year 1886, April 6th the ruler made sure that rules and regulations are introduced, moreover all matters during public conversations are dealt with and emphasized that ancient traditions are eradicated and issued an agreement by way of an oath. In 1889, Japan produced its primary constitution the European way.

The emperor was the supreme figurehead in the instituted parliament known as the Diet. Lack of unity among the members in the parliament resulted in lesser powers in the political parties. Previous feudal lords had to give back their land to the emperor to alleviate the now formed administration.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Once the land was surrendered to the administration, citizens started possessing their own land and the government imposed taxes. The education system was reformed by the Meiji regime. The French system of education was changed first, while the German system followed later.

The Meiji administration initiated universal recruitment and a new army was formed after the British convoy. Japanese intellectuals had to study overseas, moreover be taught Western science while other scholars taught in Japan. The Meiji era was serious in what they did and nothing would prevent them. This helped transform Japan’s economy from the agrarian one to the developed one.

Means of communication and land transportation were enhanced by the government through savings in the public works. After World War II, Japan evolved to an open economy.

Wages rose drastically due to industrialization talks in the Meiji regime. Establishment of a textile industry was vital since Japan had labor and cotton was a raw material. In mid 1880’s there was a financial crisis in Japan due to the huge expenses on industrialization.

Japan was involved in two major wars during the Meiji regime (Sims 12). The Sino-Japanese war between 1894and 1895 was due to divergence of interests in Korea involving China and Japan.

Taiwan and other regions from China were to be received by Japan but involvement by western powers required Japan not to accept them. Later on in 1904, there was the Russo-Japan war, which resulted from conflicts between Japan and Russia over Korea (Sims 11).

This was where the world was taken aback after the Japanese army became triumphant over the western nation. The demise of the emperor in 1912 finished the Meiji regime and the genro rule. This era saw Japan turn into a contemporary developed country. This period saw Japan grow drastically economically, socially and politically with a parliament as form governance.

We will write a custom Essay on An Aspect of Politics and Culture of Meiji in Japan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Ebley, Patricia, Walthall, Anne


History of Immigration in the United States Essay essay help online free

The threshold of the twenties century was marked by the era of industrialization in Europe, which led to mass discontent among the workers. As a result, about 27 million immigrants considered the United States as the land of new opportunities for building a better life as compared to the conditions offered in Europe.

This is of particular to concern to southern and eastern Europeans who had a considerable impact on the population shifts in the United States. Italian, Jews, French, German and English people were among the pioneers of the migration wave in 1890s.

The first immigrants arriving in the New World were more encouraged to become the members of the American community. However, later waves of immigrants were met with a prejudiced attitude. In particular, most of the residents referred to them as to the people of lower social position.

The inferior attitude and perception has been shaped toward the most multiple groups. For instance, “Italians were criminal by nature and…are as a race simpleminded and often grossly ignorant” (A New Wave of Immigrants, 1890-1920s 188).

However, the Americans themselves could not be regarded as honorable members of indigenous population of the New World. In fact, their hostility to migration groups could be presented as the attempt of Americans to prove their dominance over the new territory and exterminate all possibilities for new invasions.

Their concerns were logical, but partially, because most of their preventive measures and restrictions imposed on the new comers did not allow them to apply for a job. The point is that industrial process required cheap labor, which was available among the newcomers. However, older generations of immigrants, as well as native-born employees resisted the conditions that other newcomers were ready to accept.

The introduction of immigration process provided significant shifts in the societal organization. In particular, in migrated societies the prevalent role was imposed on men who earned money whereas the roles of women were confined to household issues, meeting with friends, and engaging in church activities (Ethnic Conflict and Immigration Restriction 190).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As result of shaping such patterns, consumerism trends had been evolving due to the increased role of women as consumers. In fact, consumerism has become the part of American culture.

The period between World War I and World War II highlighted remarkable changes in attitudes to some ethnic groups of immigrants. This is of particular to Chinese minorities whose labor was exploited and regarded as a cheap source for receiving profits.

However, these circumstances did not provide Chinese with opportunities for professional promotion regardless of their willingness to receive education and apply for respectable job positions.

Unjust and unequal treatment of national minorities generated conflicts and contradictions between indigenous population and the newcomers. Further confrontations led to the rise of race discrimination and gender inequality among the population.

In conclusion, the history of the U.S. migration premises on challenges and negative experience that the newcomers had to face before fulfilling their hopes and expectations. The native population of the United States expressed resistance to the willingness of the newcomers to accomplish their goals.

Moreover, the hostile and prejudiced attitude prevented them from equal treatment of ethnic minorities. Existence of stereotypes provoked the migrated community to enter national, race, and gender conflicts to defend their rights and freedoms. Finally, lack of understanding between the indigenous population and the newcomers developed long-term confrontation in the twentieth century as well.

Works Cited Dinnerstein, Leonard., and David Relmers. “A New Wave of Immigrants, 1890-1920s”. Ethnic Americans: A History of Immigration. Ed. Leonard Dinnerstein and David Relmers. US: Columbia University Press, 2009. 186-188. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on History of Immigration in the United States specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More —. “Ethnic Conflict and Immigration Restriction”. Ethnic Americans: A History of Immigration. Ed. Leonard Dinnerstein and David Relmers. US: Columbia University Press, 2009. 188-195. Print.


Summary: interview with a potential employee Report (Assessment) essay help

Introduction This paper is about an interview conducted with a potential employee for a job in an organization which core business is to serve children and families. The interview was conducted by two people, namely the human resource supervisor at the company, and another person who would act as an external reviewer for the process. The aim was to check how relevant the individual was to the organization.

Since the organization deals with children and family, the main focus is to be on the individual’s personality and how he or she carries out him or herself. The two interviewers would then share their notes on the same. The interview was carried out by the external assessor, while the human resource supervisor was also charged with making observations.

Patterns that have been noted by the human service supervisor There was one thing that stood out, particularly the way that both the interviewer and the interviewee introduced themselves to one another. It was appropriate since it showed that the staff has the etiquette desirable for this kind of job. In as much as the interviewer was not all that confident, the interviewee also had a problem with the same thing.

This can however be excused for people who had not done this sort of things before, or had not done many of these things enough to overcome their nervousness. Something that is encouraging for this case is how both parties, the interviewer and the interviewee, did not come out as being too aggressive.

The interviewer and the interviewee gave one another time to articulate their issues and no one did interrupt the other during the interview process. Finally, the body language of the interviewer even though, can be classified as sufficient, needs a little improvement to instill the desired level of respect from the potential staff interviewee.

Among the verbal responses that can be said to form a pattern is the claim by every interviewee that they did some voluntary work during their high school and college days. The kind of research that was done by both the interviewer and interviewee for the process was above board. Another pattern is the desire of the interviewees to become administrators in the long term in their careers.

Patterns of response noted by guest –reviewers in the interview The interviewee had no questions to ask the interviews during the interview. For both interviewers’, the interviewee appeared to be a good listener to whatever was asked and did not in any instance asked for any of the questions to be repeated.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is critical to note that the interviewee was able to maintain his level of calmness even under the level of the pressure that he was subjected to during the process of interview. He was not overly aggressive when criticized about certain things, but instead sought to make the necessary corrections in case misunderstanding occurred during the process, which is a good thing especially for the position.

The difficult part for the human resource supervisor Some parts of the interview were the most difficult for the interviewers; these parts mainly involved questions that were meant to find out the personality of the individual being interviewed. It excluded specific questions about where the interviewee had worked before.

Others included whether he had a question or not about the whole interview process. The interviewee was particularly dodgy on the issues concerning why the interviewee wanted to leave the current source of employment.

Another tricky one was why he wanted to work for that particular organization. Finally, it appears that the interviewee did not wish to disclose his weakness when asked. Probably it was because of his fear that he would lose this opportunity in case the answer was not good for the interviewers.

What the interviewers did not do to help in the interview process The interviewers both seemed to anticipate the answer that the interviewee would give, which was not good. It could lead to a biased opinion which can easily disqualify an interviewee who is qualified. Secondly, the interviewers should have utilized questions which were more open to enable them to get the most they could from the interviewee on a subject about the interviewee that they were keen on investigating.

Before the interview, the interviewees did one commendable thing that really helped much during the process. They went through the interviewee’s resume which helped in the building of a rapport with him (the interviewee). The interviewers also had a list of questions that they were to ask with them.

This helped in maintaining their focus during the interview. Finally, there were a number of mistakes done by the people conducting the interview. They talked too much even when they had got the point that they had wanted. The other mistake that the interviewers did was to accept answers that were general in nature.

We will write a custom Assessment on Summary: interview with a potential employee specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The body language by the interviewees could have passed the wrong messages to the interviewers, since they (the interviewees) were not as confident as it was expected of them during such a process. The interviewers were also not keen on the type of person or type of the performance expected of the interviewee.

They did not set the priorities that they were to look out for in this person. To come to the end of this part, they did not make a scorecard for the interview which did not give a precise way of gauging the performance of the interviewee.

What has been learnt from the interview and assessment that follows it? There are certain things that can be learnt from this; one of them is that the interviewer also has to prepare for this process. The other is that both, the interviewer and the interviewee, would be in the spotlight as the interview would take place. The other is that not only the spoken or verbal communication of both will be assessed, but also the body language which could be of immense importance.

Conclusion Interviews are crucial for an organization to get the right kind of staff. They however have to be carried out correctly and through ways that can be identified with the science of human labor. For this to be possible the right people in the selection process are necessary.

They will ensure the correct ways of identifying and analyzing potential staff. Furthermore, it is beneficial if there are other people who assess the abilities of these recruiters from time to time. In this way an organization is able to maintain the right staff.


The Benefits of Outsourcing Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction The world is increasingly becoming competitive. Firms are facing various challenges from various fronts, and it is only the best that can succeed. Competition is one of the leading challenges that firms in the current market have to deal with. New firms are coming into the market with products that are already available. Such new firms have brought about saturation of various products in the market.

Another challenge that firms in the current society have to deal with is the emerging technologies. The emerging technologies have brought a number of new trends that are posing serious challenges to the survival of the firm. It is important that a firm comes up with the best strategy that can help it manage these challenges and come out successful.

Firms must consider the way they can outsmart their competitors. This may not be easy because as they plan to outplay their competitors, the competitors are also considering the best strategy that can help them manage the competitive market.

Quality has been proven to be one of the best tools of managing competition. In order to win customers, a firm needs to ensure that it has the capacity to offer its customers the best value for their money. They have to come out strongly in the market as firms that understand the needs of the market. As such, they have to meet and exceed the expectations of the market (McLaughlin


United Nations Strengths and Weaknesses Essay best college essay help

Introduction According to Schnabel (304), the United Nations (herein referred to as the UN) is an international body charged with the responsibility of maintaining international peace. In addition, the body is charged with the responsibility of ensuring international security, cooperation, as well as social and economic development.

Schnabel (305) further insists that these responsibilities of the UN can only be achieved through collaboration with member states and employees of the organization at the grassroots level, especially women and children, who are war victims. The UN is also mandated to ensure that member states adhere to the provisions of international laws, such as human rights (United Nations Education for Conflict Prevention 205).

The body was set up back in the year 1945 as a replacement of the League of Nations. The need to replace the League of Nations with the United Nations was largely inspired by the failure of the League of Nations to prevent the outbreak of war among nations.

To ensure that the UN does not fail as its predecessor, the League of Nations, it is important to educate members of the public to enhance global peace (United Nations Education for Conflict Prevention 205). It is noted that the League of Nations was set up immediately after the end of the First World War. The establishment was meant to prevent outbreaks of war between nations in the future.

The outbreak of the Second World War, therefore, meant that the League of Nations had failed in its mandate to promote and maintain international peace. As a result of this, world leaders saw the need of creating a stronger organization that will prevent the outbreak of what came to be referred to as the ‘Third World War’. The United Nations was, therefore, formed in the process.

The UN intends to achieve international peace through democratic and peaceful means, rather than through the use of force. Doyle claims that “democracy promotes peace and mutual respect among democratic people” (p. 5). He goes ahead to state that democracy promotes human rights and decreases state repression (Doyle 4). According to the scholar, “…….democratic liberalism embodies a constitutional government” (Doyle 6).

Though the United Nations is regarded as a body that is totally independent from the League of Nations, the organization borrowed a lot from the latter’s organizational structure. Furthermore, the League of Nations remained in existence to see to it that the United Nations was successfully established.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to Drezner (9), the League of Nations shielded the UN from financial and logistic crisis during its formative stages. The observation explains the reason why the League of Nations was formally dissolved on April 1946, whereas the United Nation was formerly formed in October 1945 (Drezner 9).

Membership to the organization is open to any nation in the world, provided the aspiring member meets the laid down requirements.

Critics have accused the organization of favoring developed nations, especially the United States of America, thus undermining the trust of other nations as far as the organization is concerned. According to Ruggie (32), the United Nations has in the past been criticized for protecting the interests of the developed countries at the expense of the developing nations in such fields as oil mining. T

he current paper seeks to compare and contrast the strengths and weaknesses of the United Nations. In addition, the author suggests ways through which the United Nations can be strengthened to make the organization more effective in fulfilling its mandate.

Literature Review A Comparative Analysis of the Strengths and Weaknesses of the United Nations

According to Jomo (205), good governance among world leaders would help in solving local problems, thus leaving the UN with the responsibility of solving international conflicts. Doyle claims that “politics is a dangerous jungle” (p. 5).

Therefore, changing the political environment in the world will go a long way in changing the character of nations. World leaders must, however, embrace these changes through peaceful consensus in their countries.

It is important to note that the United Nations may lack the capacity to solve each and every crisis in the world today. However, this notwithstanding, the organization has effectively enhance international peace since 1945. Since the inception of the organization, there has never been any major world dispute threatening international peace (Jomo 204).

We will write a custom Essay on United Nations Strengths and Weaknesses specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The United Nations has several strengths that have helped it carry out its mandate over the years. One of the major strengths of the United Nations is the frequent funding by the member nations, nongovernmental organizations, and other well wishers.

The role of the United Nations in ensuring worldwide peace and security has earned the body wide spread support from well wishers across the globe (“Welcome to the United Nations: It’s your World” par. 1). To this end, many corporations have in the past made contributions to the United Nations.

The contributions from such corporations and other well wishers come in the form of monetary funding, as well as the provision of the necessary equipment and personnel to support United Nations’ programs. In addition, member nations make contributions to the United Nations to help the organization carry out its responsibilities effectively.

The contributions help in sustaining the organization’s ongoing projects, as well as facilitate the implementation of new ones. Needless to say, policy implementation and commissioning of projects requires a great deal of funding from member countries. The United Nations comprises of 193 member states, thus assuring the organization of worldwide support.

Doyle states that “multilateral support offered by states is useful since it frees the United Nations from the taint of foreign control” (p. 6). In addition to the support, funding enables the organization to adequately carry out its internal affairs, such as the remuneration of staff working in its various agencies (Carpenter 25). Availability of funding ensures that the existence of this organization is not threatened.

As much as the funding issue is one of the major strengths of the United Nations, it is also one of its major weaknesses. Carpenter (28) is of the view that funding remains a major weakness in the United Nations. Contributions made to the organization are not adequate enough to fund all of its activities.

According to Carpenter (28), some of the operations carried out by UN, such as military and naval engagements, are very expensive. The organization requires a lot of funds to sustain such activities. As a result, the organization finds itself unable to implement large projects that require huge capital investments.

Unwillingness by member nations to make their contributions to the organization also comes as a major weakness to the United Nations. The United Nations, which is an international organization, requires a considerably large amount of funding. However, the organization survives on a budget that is less than that of the New York City. Some nations may fail to, or delay, in making their contributions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on United Nations Strengths and Weaknesses by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The failure delays the implementation of the projects initiated by the organization. Issues related to funding have raised concerns over the capability of the organization to maintain lasting peace and development among the communities and nations in the world. The UN has gone to the extent of borrowing from its developed member states (Simmons 58).

The United Nations leads in championing for human and civilian rights in the world, leaving the general population with no option but to trust the organization (Drezner 11). The involvement of the body in many peaceful negotiations and diplomatic talks in the world today can also be considered as one of the factors promoting its popularity around the world (Moravcsik 16).

In addition to this, the contribution made by the organization towards the fight against colonization and apartheid helped it gain popularity among many African and Asian leaders. The leaders of these nations were encouraged to join the organization after having acquired independence from their colonial masters.

Close to all Asian and African countries are members of the UN. The large number of members assures the organization of widespread support in the two regions.

However, the inability of the United Nations to achieve universal consensus is a major weakness, which affects its operations. Many nations condemn some of the actions taken by the United Nations, thus threatening the organization’s influence over international matters. According to Nye (70), it is obvious that not all parties will be favored by the decisions taken by the UN, which may at times cause conflicts between member states.

Some critics have labeled the organization as being partial, raising queries about its ability to fairly deal with matters affecting international peace and security (United Nations Arab Human Development 203). The organization is, for instance, accused of partiality as far as the incursion of the United States of America in Iraq is concerned. Moravcsik states that “democracy should not be forced nor imposed” (p. 17).

The Bush Administration was completely wrong to meddle with Iraq affairs, although the attack was seen to be in good faith. The body failed to stop the United States of America from fighting Iraq, a situation that saw the organization lose favor among many Arab nations in the world.

Failure by the United Nations to intervene in the war between Palestine and Israel also raised questions over its credibility and ability to handle international matters. Moreover, the United Nations failed to condemn NATO’s bombing over the former Yugoslavia, a situation that raised concerns over the organizations ability to solve matters without taking sides.

The United Nations imposed trade sanctions on Zimbabwe, claiming that the country is undemocratic. The sanctions were seen by many as an indication of the organization’s favoritism towards the interests of the United Kingdom in the country.

The organization lacks a military force. However, this lack of a military force does not prevent the body from imposing military sanctions on terrorists and other unlawful elements in the world today. Carpenter states that “there is no Global police force to combat crime” (p. 26). A good example of such situations is the just concluded war against the Al-Shabaab militants by the Kenyan army.

With the help of the Kenyan Defense Forces, the United Nations finally liberated the Somali people from the militia rule. According to Nye (69), the United Nations uses intelligence information provided by member countries to prevent the occurrence of war and disputes.

The agreement to share resources between member states has also seen the agencies run by the United Nations use member countries’ resources in times of crisis. Kenya, for example, was used to shelter hundreds of thousands of refugees from Somalia.

Another weakness is the organization’s overdependence on developed nations. The overdependence has greatly impacted on the organization’s ability to make impartial decisions (United Nations Year in Review 80). Since these nations make some of the major contributions to the United Nations, the body finds it hard to impose sanctions on them.

The development raises doubts over the ability of the United Nations to solve disputes impartially. For example, the United States of America has in the past been condemned over its interference with the decision made by the organization.

The United States of America has in the past been accused of hoarding nuclear weapons, yet the UN has done nothing about it. The interference means that the organization makes decision that favors the country over others in the world.

How the United Nations can be Made More Effective

The success of the United Nations is attributed to the overall success of its various agencies (United Nations Towards a Green Economy 620). The effectiveness of the various agencies will, therefore, ultimately translate to the effectiveness of the entire body. Though the United Nations has successfully averted the outbreak of a ‘Third World War’, a lot can still be done to improve the effectiveness of the organization.

Adequate funding is one of the most effective means of improving the operations of the United Nations. Lack of a regular budget negatively affects the ability of the organization to carry out its responsibilities effectively and within the set time lines. The United Nations, as a body, does not have a reliable and regular source of revenue.

Consequently, the organization has to depend on the governments of the member countries for annual funding (Telhami 46). In addition, the body lacks the mechanism to get the much required funds from the governments without their consent. Telhami (46) insists that the attitude that nations have towards the United Nations leaves the organization at the mercies of the member states.

Seeking an alternative form of revenue for the body will, therefore, improve the effectiveness of the organization. Though some critics argue that the United Nations should be a non- profitable organization, generating income would go a long way in making the organization more independent from the member states, especially the developed countries.

As earlier indicated in this paper, the developed nations are the largest contributors to the budget of the United Nations. As a result, the developed nations take advantage of the United Nations, using the organization as a platform to push for their agendas in international forums. It is the obligation of each and every member state to see to it that the United Nations is adequately funded.

The organization is an international body charged with the responsibility of safeguarding the welfare of the entire world (Doyle 4). Taxing powers will, for instance, go a long way in providing adequate and regular income to the organization.

Member states can make the United Nations more effective by enhancing the implementation of the organization’s laws and policies at the local level. Governments can ease the work of the United Nations by taking responsibility over all the activities taking place within their borders.

The laws of the United Nations laws should be integrated into local laws and constitutions to ensure that the laws governing member countries are in line with the guidelines set by the United Nations at the international level.

According to Ruggie (34), countries should formulate their own policies to regulate the activities of people and groups operating within their territories. According to Drezner (9), a responsible nation will not require a lot of monitoring, which is the case with failed governments that have to be assisted every now and then to restore peace and order within their borders.

Member nations should also strive to safeguard human rights. Human rights are universal, meaning that it is the responsibility of each and every government to protect its people. Simmons states that “governments should protect their own” (p. 58). Since no government has the jurisdiction to operate outside its borders, the United Nations is left with the responsibility of restoring international peace, law, and order.

Peaceful co-existence can be achieved through such activities as constitutional reforms, disarming citizens, as well as prosecuting and punishing individuals who breach the internationally set laws.

By so doing, the governments will ease the responsibility of the United Nations, which will help the organization to focus on more serious issues, such as promoting international peace and security, as well as dealing with various natural disasters, such as famine.

The issue of veto power is a matter of concern for most critics. The various critics feel that decisions affecting the entire world are left at the hands of only a few nations. The five veto powers do not even make up 5 percent of the world’s population. Terminating such a system will be a major step towards improving the effectiveness of the United Nations.

In the past, the five veto powers, which are China, Russia, United States, United Kingdom, and France, have used the organization to settle their differences. They do this by associating themselves with decisions that best suit their interests. The organization was, for instance, used as a front to propagate the cold war between the United States and the Soviet Union (Goldstein and Pevehouse 56).

The same organization was supposed to put an end to the cold war. The elimination of Veto powers will also create a feeling of equality and fairness among nations. It will mean that other nations are free to give their views on global matters. Therefore, individual and community interests will be effectively addressed in the process.

Conclusion The success of the United Nations in fulfilling its mandate is entirely dependent on its various strengths and weaknesses. Funding the organization, for instance, has greatly affected the ability of the body to carry out its mandate in the recent past. Availability of funds is the driving force behind the success of any organization.

The organization, however, lacks a stable source of income, hampering its ability to fulfill its mandate at times. The ability to make impartial decisions is vital in ensuring the success of the United Nations. However, overdependence on member states deprives the organization of the ability to be impartial.

The popularity of the organization is the world will go a long way in promoting its effectiveness. It is, therefore, the responsibility of member nations to strengthen their organization for a better tomorrow.

Works Cited Carpenter, Charli. “Securing the Seas.” International Relations: 2012-2013 Updates. Ed. Joshua Goldstein and Jon Pevehouse. New York: Pearson, 2012. 6-12. Print.

Doyle, Michael. “Democratizing World Politics.” International Relations: 2012-2013 Updates. Ed. Joshua Goldstein and Jon Pevehouse. New York: Pearson, 2012. 4-6. Print.

Drezner, Daniel. “Regulating Global Complexity.” International Relations: 2012-2013 Updates. Ed. Joshua Goldstein and Jon Pevehouse. New York: Pearson, 2012. 18-21. Print.

Goldstein, Joshua, and J. Pevehouse. International Relations: 2012-2013 Update, New York: Pearson, 2012. Print.

Jomo, Kwame. Is Good Governance Good for Development, New York: United Nations, 2012. Print.

Moravcsik, Andrew. “Affirming Democracy in International Organizations.” International Relations: 2012-2013 Updates. Ed. Joshua Goldstein and Jon Pevehouse. New York: Pearson, 2012. 97-100. Print.

Nye, Joseph. “Diversifying American Power.” International Relations: 2012-2013 Updates. Ed. Joshua Goldstein and Jon Pevehouse. New York: Pearson, 2012. 24-26. Print.

Ruggie, John. “Governing Transnational Corporations.” International Relations: 2012-2013 Updates. Ed. Joshua Goldstein and Jon Pevehouse. New York: Pearson, 2012. 54-60. Print.

Schnabel, Albrecht. Defying Victimhood: Women and Post-conflict Peace Building, New York: United Nations, 2012. Print.

Simmons, Beth. “Institutionalizing Human Rights.” International Relations: 2012-2013 Updates. Ed. Joshua Goldstein and Jon Pevehouse. New York: Pearson, 2012. 27-30. Print.

Telhami, Shibley. “Understanding Attitudes on Middle East Peace.” International Relations: 2012-2013 Updates. Ed. Joshua Goldstein and Jon Pevehouse. New York: Pearson, 2012. 48-52. Print.

United Nations. Education for Conflict Prevention and Peace building: Meeting the Global Challenges of the 21st Century. New York: United Nations, 2012. Print.

—. Arab Human Development Report 2012: From Paralysis to Empowerment – The Will of the People. New York: United Nations, 2012. Print.

—. Towards a Green Economy: Pathways to Sustainable Development and Poverty Eradication. New York: United Nations, 2012. Print.

—. Year in Review 2011: United Nations Peace Operations. New York: United Nations, 2012. Print. Welcome to the United Nations: It’s your World 2011. Web. .


Review: “Close Encounters: Communication in Relationships” by Guerrero, Andersen and Afifi Term Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Understanding new relationships


Counselors’ Self-Disclosure

Relationship Development

Effective Counseling



Introduction This paper considers the book Close Encounters: Communication in Relationships by Guerrero, Andersen and Afifi. The authors of the book look at interpersonal communication by adopting relational approach from Human Services (counseling) perspective.

They highlight how one can understand close relationships between families, romantic partners, and friends. They also emphasize the essence of communication in any relationship (Guerrero, Andersen and Afifi, 2011).

People have the desire to enhance their relationships as they socialize. This process depends on relationships with others. It presents challenges of needs for fulfillment and acceptance as we relate with others. These challenges provide opportunities for counselors to understand human relationships in a social context. Thus, understanding the concept of self-disclosure is necessary for professional counselors.

Understanding new relationships Scholars like Mark Knapp have studied relationships and developed models for understanding various stages of developing new relationships. Knapp highlights concepts of “escalation” and “de-escalation” in stages of relationship development. These refer to “coming together” and “coming apart” (Welch and Rubin, 2002).

The insights into human relationship developments are useful in counseling because counselors must be able to understand and identify stages in relationships based on information people give them about their communication and relationship developments.

Studies have shown that developing interpersonal skills are necessary for self-confidence. Thus, it is necessary for counselors to understand scientific studies in personal relationships. It is also important for people to understand themselves first as they develop techniques of building relationships with others.

In this context, relationships people develop during infancy, childhood, adolescence stages, and as young adults are significant in developing relationships and personal developments (Reis et al, 2000).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These are important stages of life, which counselors must understand. They identify intimacy in life more than any other stage. Formations of relationships such as dating act as adaptive techniques people apply while coping with changes in life.

People seek for identities by using intimacy because of concerns for themselves since we begin to seek autonomy from infancy stage. At an adolescence stage, people seek individualism and acceptance from peers and people around them. As we become adults, we seek adulthood identity. It is important to understand that we can effectively manage these stages of life through developing relationships with others.

Self-Disclosure People tend to protect their valuable personal information and attributes. Occasionally, we disclose such information to others during interactions. This leads to loss of privacy. In this sense, we must develop decision-making processes to enable us to understand whether disclosing personal information to other party is appropriate or not.

Both individuals and counselors must understand that self-disclosure leads to loss of privacy. However, the decision-making process should consider both advantages and disadvantages of doing so as we may not know the immediate benefits of self-disclosure. This implies that disclosure has a significant effect on determining people’s development. This reflects the normal situation of human relationships.

Dindia and Allen demonstrate that there are differences in ways people tend to disclosure personal information to other agents. They identified “decision-making mechanisms people use when disclosing personal information in stages of relationship developments” (Dindia and Allen, 1992). Their study showed that people who had adopted a decision-making mechanism lost less privacy than other people who had not.

Dindia and Allen observed that there were differences in the way men and women disclosed personal information and attributes. For instance, they noted that men were likely to disclose sensitive personal information to female counselors or interviewers. However, they did not establish whether the gender of the interviewer had effect on cases of sexual and mental behaviors (Dindia and Allen, 1992).

On the other hand, other studies also established that women were willing to disclosure personal information more than their male counterparts. In addition, studies also demonstrated that women were willing to engage in high-levels of self-exposure more than men, especially about their intimate relationships.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Review: “Close Encounters: Communication in Relationships” by Guerrero, Andersen and Afifi specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Espinosa, Garcia-Fornes, and Sierra note that some people have extensive personal information about each other. They observed that people tend to share intimate information more with their partners than other people. According to them, such self-disclosure and disclosure of information between partners play a significant role in developing an intimate relationship (Such et al, 2012).

In regards to the intimacy development and self-disclosure, Dindia and Allen note that women have ease and high rate of emotional expressiveness. These tendencies enhance their abilities to develop intimate relationships. Dindia and Allen argue that ‘fat talk’ among women may explain why women have tendencies to disclose their personal information.

In this sense, fat talk is a means of affirming female communication style, and a way of expressing female physique within a cultural context. This tendency also allows women to seek more for help and engage in emotional and private matters than men do.

Professional counselors must understand characteristics which define human behavior for effective counseling. Understanding characteristics of human behaviors will enable counselors to apply self-disclosure. Basically, they must communicate with their subjects in a specific manner to achieve intended objectives.

Self-disclosure can present challenges to counselors due to loss of privacy associated with it. Thus, counselor must learn how to facilitate the client’s disclosure through “modeling and the establishment of trust” (Such et al, 2012). This process requires counselors to disclose their personal information to establish a relationship with the client. It is a stage of establishing rapport, developing communication, and trust with the client.

Self-disclosure is ethical and a valuable approach as it enables counselors to understand their clients. It helps in obtaining useful information necessary for developing human relationships.

Counselors’ Self-Disclosure Not all scholars in counseling agree on self-disclosure by counselors. The argument is that clients may avoid their own self-disclosure. However, counselors’ self-disclosure is suitable for facilitating the development of relationship with the client.

It is also a source of reassurance for clients during counseling. Counselors also view self-disclosure as a method of modeling to encourage clients to disclose personal information. In this process, clients observe counselors’ self-disclosure and do so themselves.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Review: “Close Encounters: Communication in Relationships” by Guerrero, Andersen and Afifi by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Counselors can only create intimacy or develop an intimate relationship with clients through sharing their own experiences. Counselor’s self-disclosure helps in establishing trust so that clients can also have trust in them. For instance, a counselor who looks burnt-out but denies it becomes a liar before a client.

Consequently, the client may not trust such a counselor. Therefore, counselor should also acknowledge accurate observation of clients. This makes a counselor a genuine partner in an intimate relationship.

However, we have to note that relationships are different. Therefore, counselors must make appropriate choices about disclosures. Self-disclosure and self-awareness are useful for counselors as they act as forms of supervision for counselors. They help in avoidance of emotional burnout.

Self-disclosure by both parties should serve the interest of a client in therapeutic situations. Counselor’s self-disclosure should not result into difficulties for the client. In addition, such disclosures should not be excessive in their nature.

Relationship Development Reis, Collins, and Berscheid show how social relationships influence human behavior and development. As a result, psychologists have gained interests in the field. These authors note the importance of advancing studies in psychological knowledge so that we can understand human behaviors and relationship developments.

The initiation stage marks the initial point of developing a relationship (coming together). This is where the first impression is critical between people in a relationship because it is the first point of contact. People pay attention to the body languages and overall appearance of others when developing a relationship.

People in relationships have various ways of portraying themselves. The intention is to capture the attention of the other party. As the relationship progresses, people will try to find common factors between them. These may include hobbies and general preferences and interests.

Exchange of information plays a significant role as people probe each other so that they can enhance their social relationship. This is a crucial stage as people not interested in divulging personal information lose interests. Psychologists observe that some relationships may end at this stage (Guerrero, Andersen and Afifi, 2011).

It explains why Guerrero, Andersen and Afifi highlight the importance of communication in a relationship. Given the role of social media in promoting relationship developments, Tang and Wang investigated disclosure tendencies based on social penetration theory using social bloggers. They established differences between male and female bloggers in self-disclosure.

The level of disclosure among men and women bloggers varied with age and type of information disclosed. Female bloggers disclosed more information than their male counterparts. On the other hand, young bloggers (below 20 years old) disclosed varied topics to their fellow bloggers (Tang and Wang, 2012).

However, some relationships may survive and proceed to the next stage. This is the stage of “intensifying relationships among people” (Welch and Rubin, 2002). At this point, people tend to engage in testing relationships so as to establish the levels of reciprocity from their partners (Savicki, 1972). However, there are always different levels of self-disclosure for establishing impression.

This stage is also responsible for establishing the extent of self-disclosure between people. People employ diverse strategies such as gifts, expressions, and body appearances to develop a relationship. These strategies differ between one relationship to another as there are no specific guidelines to follow (Welch and Rubin, 2002). Therefore, counselors must understand every relationship within its context.

Forgas notes that emotional factors also influence the level of self-disclosure. Recent studies show that people in positive moods tend to disclose “intimate, varied, and abstract information about themselves” (Forgas, 2011). On the other hand, people who had negative moods were “attentive to the behavior of others and reciprocated self-disclosure from their partners accurately” (Forgas, 2011).

From Forgas’ study, counselors can understand the importance of “emotions in influencing processing of information and relationship behaviors” (Forgas, 2011) among people.

Effective Counseling People tend to focus on their own well-being than on others meaning that people tend to defend their ideas, behaviors, and perspectives. Given these challenges, we note that relationships between people remain complex and difficult to understand. As a result, the role of a counselor is crucial for people to understand themselves and foster effective communications in relationships.

Self-disclosure remains a healthy form of communication that an individual uses in fostering communication and relationship development. This strategy can help people handle emotions, which affect human behaviors and information processing. Counselors must foster self-disclosure skills and effective communication. This process requires the counselor to build a rapport, and trust the client.

Counselors must create environments which allow clients to express themselves. Some of the approaches may include curiosity, empathy, and communication. These enhance clients’ expression of emotions. Counselors must also master skills which allow them not to express judgment or prejudice their clients. They must understand emotional insights, relationship development, and self introspection.

Conclusion Guerrero, Andersen, and Afifi pinpoint areas which typically enhance development of relationships among people. Thus, communication is an effective tool for developing an intimate relationship. It is also useful for counselors who need to understand relationship development through information they obtain from clients.

Therefore, understanding communication processes and how communications influence behaviors and needs of people in any given situation enhances relationship development between people.

For counselors, understanding communication should involve effective evaluation procedures. This allows a counselor to understand various techniques people use in communication so that they can improve, or change a communication process in a manner that can aid clients make changes for self-disclosure.

Counselors must understand various dynamics in therapeutic relationships because the role of counselor is paramount in aiding changes. Thus, in self-disclosure, counselors must know how much personal information they should share with the client based on some particular situation.

As it has been established above, several factors influence self-disclosure. These include gender, age, culture, sexual orientation, emotions, and mental abilities among other factors of people. Therefore, counselors must determine ways of developing relationships with their clients based on prevailing circumstances.

References Dindia, K. and Allen, M. (1992). Sex differences in self-disclosure: A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin, 112(1), 106-124.

Forgas, J. P. (2011). Affective Influences on Self-Disclosure: Mood Effects on the Intimacy and Reciprocity of Disclosing Personal Information. Journal of Personality


The Business Role in the Economy Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Role of Business in the Society

Roles of For-Profit and Nonprofit Organizations in the Economy

Impact of Current Fiscal and Monetary Policy on the Economy

Accessing Global Market through Outsourcing at Toyota

Corporate Social Responsibility

Role of Business in the Society The main role of business in the society is to produce both goods and services in order to meet demand created by the public. However, it must do so in such a way that companies also make profits so that they can continue to exist.

Businesses provide goods and services that both the public and governments cannot do without having. In addition to this, businesses also consume both products and services from both the government and the public such as labour. Therefore, it is also the responsibility of any business to give back to society. This way the company will gain acceptability in society.

Business has the moral obligation to the consumers and the public not to produce goods and services that have the potential to cause any harm to people. In addition, it is the responsibility of business not to unreasonably over charge the consumers for its goods and services.

Recently it is has become the responsibility of business to contribute to the wellbeing of the society in which it carries out its business in the sense that a better society means a better environment for doing business.

In fact, a business social dimension is a plus in the conduct of business. It makes the very people who buy services and goods the mere existence of that business. This makes them to want to buy their products, which creates customer loyalty.

Business also has the obligation to trade fairly with other businesses and its suppliers to ensure an optimal business environment and to meet its financial obligations accordingly. It also has the responsibility to obey the laws of the country/state in which it is carrying out its business.

Roles of For-Profit and Nonprofit Organizations in the Economy Profit and nonprofit organizations contribute to the growth of an economy. They both offer employment and contribute to the GDP. In 2011, for example, nonprofit organizations contributed about 5 % of the United States’ GDP. These organizations also offer employment to youth and create a sense of purpose in society by championing for certain causes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For profit organizations, on the other hand, exist purely for profit making purposes. They pay tax and contribute to the economic development by employing individuals who in turn pay tax and use their disposable incomes to spur growth in various sectors of the economy.

Additionally, profit organizations engage in social responsibility work. This ensures that they maintain close contact with the business market and shows a sense of responsibility towards their sources of resources.

Impact of Current Fiscal and Monetary Policy on the Economy The government uses two policies to control money supply in a country. That is, expansionary and contractionary policy with the effect of increasing and reducing money supply respectively. The effect of expansionary policy on the AA-DD model is a shift to the right. This increases the exchange rate of a country’s money with respect to another country. However, this does not happen fast.

It takes on a transitional mode with many factors at play. For example, the real money supply exceeds the real money demand. This, in the short run, means that inflation levels increase quickly.

However, the trend lags as more people convert their money assets into non-money assets to beat or take advantage of the inflation levels. In the long term, the natural effect is that the exchange rate will increase with the amount of cash in the economy.

The US Government employs the contractionary monetary policy when the money supply in an economy reduces. This reduction has the effect of shifting the AA-DD model downwards. When this happens, there is an immediate reduction in Gross National Product of a country. It also leads to a relatively stronger local currency.

Fiscal policy refers to government spending. The government is the biggest consumer and its consumption has many policy effects on the economy. The government uses this power to effect policies in a country through either reduction in spending (contractionary fiscal policy) or increase in spending (expansionary fiscal policy). An increase in government spending causes AA-DD model to shift to the right.

We will write a custom Essay on The Business Role in the Economy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This causes a decrease in the exchange rate. For example, the Canadian dollar would do better than the American dollar in this situation. However, this leads to an increase in the GNP for the country. This is because it may attract more foreign investment as it is favorable to them. There are many causes for an expansionary policy. This includes transfer payments, tax reductions, and government direct spending.

Accessing Global Market through Outsourcing at Toyota Outsourcing has become a trend in today’s business environment and Toyota is no exception of the firms that are increasingly outsourcing production of goods and services. It is not possible for the firm to produce every component that it requires in the production of its vehicles.

Even if it were possible to produce all these components, it would be more expensive as it may mean having other completely different plans and work set-ups. Additionally outsourcing allows the firm to concentrate on the core business of the firm and hence giving the firm room to be more efficient and effective in doing its core business. It also allows the firm to gain access to higher-level expertise and experience.

This may be unavailable within its staff or which is expensive to employ. Other benefits include legality of the process done on contractual basis, risk avoidance, tax benefit, commoditization, and many more. An example of components that the firm outsources includes wheels and oil.

Toyota, a multi-national company, gets its suppliers all over the word as long as they provide what the company requires and for a reasonable price in accordance with the firm’s intentions. This shows that outsourcing will increase market penetration to countries where Toyota does not operate and further increase its profits.

Corporate Social Responsibility CSR obligation surpasses what the law requires a firm to do. It is the responsibility an organization takes upon itself to better the social lives of both the workforce and society. Currently, this is a worldwide trend.

This is because of the pressure from society and governments for organizations to feel more responsible for the sources of their resources. The members of society are also more sophisticated than sometime back. The competitive environment is also cutthroat with more companies joining the framework.

Corporate Social Responsibility at Toyota has greatly affected society in different areas of life. Among the greatest beneficiaries is the environment. Toyota has taken up the challenge of conserving the environment, as it is becoming a necessity for the whole of the business fraternity in the world to engage in environmental conservation activities.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Business Role in the Economy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Consequently, the world’s society is gaining from Toyota’s efforts, for instance increase in rainfall around the world, reduced global warming etc. The company is producing environmentally friendly cars such as Prius and actively engaging environmental conservation efforts at the corporate level such as planting trees.


The Origins, Production and Consumption of Cumin, Trace and Explored Report college essay help near me

The Oriental culture has always been a closed book for the rest of the world. However, it is not only the mystery, but also the specific charm and exotics that catch the attention of the Western people and make them explore the wonders of the East. The Eastern cuisine is no exception, which makes a great case for checking on some of its most exotic elements.

Even though the Eastern cuisine has been unknown to most of the Western culture for centuries, the plant called cumin, or jeera, has been exported from the Eastern countries to the West for several centuries, making the world taste the Oriental cuisine and get a touch of exotics with a single taste of the exotic plant known as jeera, or cumin.

Before going any further, it is necessary to introduce the subject matter to the audience. Though no longer something from the other universe, cumin is still a pretty exotic plant and rather original species for most of the European and American continents, cumin is known among botanists.

Belonging to the family of apiaceae, cumin shares the typical features of the plants of the given group. According to Rita, Aninda and Animesh, Cuminum Cyminum L. (Family: Umbelliferae, common name – Cumin, Safad Jira, Zeera) is an important seed spices of commercial importance (202). It is also quite peculiar that the plant is used not only as spices for Asian cuisine, but also as a raw material for medicine:

The annual herb (seeds and essential oil) possesses potential therapeutic uses (antibacterial activity against Pseudomonas aeruginosa, antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, antidiabetic, anticancerous among others) including Ayurvedic medicine (dyspepsia, diarrhea, jaundice, also considered stimulant, carminative, stomachic, astringent, etc.). (Rita, Aninda and Animesh 202)

Therefore, the plant is known not only for its palatability, but also for the effect it has on people having certain diseases. However, for the given research, the focus is going to be on cumin as a sort of spices. A unique and really peculiar object for a study, cumin is worth taking a closer look at.

Diving deeper into the history of cumin and its origin, it is quite peculiar to note that the people who started the tradition of adding cumin to their dishes, surprisingly enough, were not the residents of the East, as it would be most logical to suggest.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Another group of Mediterranean residents, the population of the Ancient Greece were the first people to use the plant which had such fabulous smell as a flavor and taste enhancer for their dishes. Unfortunately, it is practically impossible nowadays to find out which dish was the first to contain a pinch of jeera in it; however, it is a historical fact that the Ancient Greeks were the first people to discover the delightful taste of cumin:

The near magical properties of Cumin have been known to mankind since ancient times. Native Syria where it thrives in the hot and arid lands it was known to Turkey, Greece and found its way to Spain from where the word cumin passed on to Western Europe and the English language. (Spice Encyclopedia para.13)

Therefore, it can be considered that the Ancient Greeks were the first people to taste cumin. However, the given hypothesis seems rather questionable, since the plant comes from Syria, which means that the Syrians were supposed to be the first people to discover the properties of jeera.

It could be assumed, though, that the medical specifics of the plant were the focus of the Syrians, while the taste was not considered anything special. Anyway, despite the obscure history of discovery, cumin has integrated into the lives of millions of people in the modern world, which means that its first discovery and application are curious, yet not quite relevant facts.

To start with, it will be necessary to take a look at the countries which cumin has originated from. As one must have thought, the plant was cultivated in the Asian region, which is practically why the plant is popular in the East so much. As a matter of fact, it can even be considered that cumin, or jeera, is a specific symbol of the Asian countries.

However, it would be better to say that jeera could have been the symbol of Mediterranean countries; according to what trustworthy sources say, this is where the plant came from. Taking a closer look at the map of jeera origin, one can see distinctly that the Mediterranean area is exactly where cumin comes from:

Figure 1. The Areas of Cumin Origin

We will write a custom Report on The Origins, Production and Consumption of Cumin, Trace and Explored specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Despite the fact that the Mediterranean area includes not only Syria, Iran and Turkey, but also a number of European countries like Italy and Greece, it is rather weird that cumin is not cultivated in the latter.

Perhaps, the plant has become so closely intertwined with the Easter culture over the centuries that Italy, Greece and other Mediterranean countries do not consider cultivating cumin as an option. Anyway, judging by the evidence offered in the Figure 1, it can be suggested that Mediterranean area, especially Iran and Syria, were the epicenter of cumin growth.

Considering the above-mentioned information about the countries where cumin was found first, one can possibly guess the sources in which cumin was first mentioned, as well as what nation and at what time period discovered the given spices.

As one must have guessed, the history of cumin discovery and first attempts at using it root deep into the history of the humankind and start since the beginning of the era of Anno Domini. According to Boning, Bible was the book which mentioned cumin first as a plant used in cooking.

Boning claims that “It has been employed as a spice since biblical times” (79). As a matter of fact, cumin gets even its own mentioning in the Bible. As Hoffman and Hoffman explain, cumin is “another spice that predates Biblical times. In Matthew 23, Jesus says: … ye pay tithe of Mint and Anise and Cumin’” (18).

Therefore, it can be considered that, in the course of its long and proud history, cumin was best known for its taste and the way it could be used in cooking.

Nevertheless, even with all its incredibly delicious taste and the flavor enhancing abilities, cumin has been unknown to a great chunk of the Western population for quite long, and it was not until the era of the Spanish explorers that cumin became famous all over the world. According to Boning, “The Spanish introduced cumin to the Western Hemisphere” (79), which the humankind will always be grateful to Spain for.

However, despite the fact that cumin originated in the Mediterranean area, it is produced in a number of countries, some of which do not all under the category of Mediterranean ones.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Origins, Production and Consumption of Cumin, Trace and Explored by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Taking a closer look at the places where cumin is produced, one can possibly understand the true value of the plant and figure out whether cumin is a significant element of the total range of products which are exported from Asian countries into the Western countries.

It is essential to emphasize that, even though cumin originates from the Mediterranean area, it could have been easily transported to any other place of the world and, therefore, cultivated in a completely different place quite successfully.

Of course, such factors of cumin growth as climate, especially humidity and temperature must be taken into account when analyzing tits places of cultivation, yet the fact that cumin could be spread all over the world cannot be denied.

Figure 2. World Map of Cumin Production

Analyzing the evidence sown in the Figure 2, one can come to the conclusion that cumin is produced nowadays mostly in the countries of the Mediterranean area, i.e., the area where the plant actually comes from. However, a second glance at the map shows that cumin is also exported from India, which is quite peculiar given the fact that India was not the country where the plant has come from.

There can be various explanations as for the above-mentioned fact. Among the most obvious ones the geographical location seems legit enough. Indeed, it can be considered that the Indian climate is quite close to the Mediterranean one, which makes India a perfect place to grow cumin in, with the annual production rates making 30,000 tons of cumin (Cumin Mandi Rates para. 1).

The latter is basically predetermined by the specifics of the plant. According to Boning, “Cumin is adaptable and relatively easy to gro. It performs best in the sun and prefers a dry, Mediterranean-like climate. It is fairly drought tolerant” (Boning 79), which explains why cumin cannot be cultivated in such countries as Great Britain with its mostly rainy and windy weather, and South America with its tropical climate.

Another peculiar change of location is Turkey. Even though cumin was not originally grown there, it is still quite understood what made the population of the country start growing the plant. With its specific taste, it completed the Turkish cuisine and seemed its integral part.

Finally, the issue of consumption of cumin must be touched upon. It is quite understood that the population of the countries which grow cumin uses it in their daily cooking and considers the spices a part and parcel of their cuisine; however, when it comes to the rest of the world, it seems rather doubtful that a great chunk of the population would accept something that distinct and different from the Western culture as cumin.

However, weirdly enough, the aforementioned assumption has proven completely wrong; as it turns out, there are a number of Western countries and cultures which use cumin in their cuisine. Taking a glance at the world’s major places of cumin consumption, one can easily evaluate the importance of the given plant.

Figure 3. World Map of Cumin Consumption

As the map shows, the main spots of cumin consumption are Japan, Brazil, the United Kingdom and the United States. Analyzing the obtained information, one must say that the results offered in the map are rather surprising.

Indeed, if the consumption of cumin in Japan can be easily explained by the fact that Japan is an eastern country and, therefore, must have been influenced by other eastern culinary traditions, the fact that cumin is a traditional spices in, say, Great Britain, is rather surprising.

Moreover, such a country as Brazil, which is so detached from the Asian continent that it must have literally nothing in common with the latter, is one of the world’s greatest consumers of cumin, which is another surprise. However, it is worth noting that the situation in the USA, where cumin has obviously become an integral part of culinary, is not as much surprising.

Indeed, being a place where one can find the representatives of literally every other culture, there must be a huge chunk of Asians among immigrants; consequently, in their own diaspora, they use cumin in the process of cooking, which makes the USA one of the world’s leaders in cumin consumption.

Weirdly enough, cumin has become not only a plant used for certain purposes in the Eastern cuisine. Moreover, cumin is even more than simply a symbol of the East. Tightly intertwined with the very spirit of the East, cumin is associated with a number of superstitions. Which is even more important, cumin is nowadays associated with a number of superstitions:

Many superstitions are associated with cumin. A happy life awaited the bride and groom who carried cumin in the wedding ceremony. If the seed was cursed when it was planted, it would produce a wonderful crop. (Hoffman and Hoffman 18)

The above-mentioned signifies that cumin has become the symbol of the East, a part and parcel of the Eastern culture. Although it used to be the element of the Oriental cuisine several decades ago, it seems to have spread all over the world nowadays and is used by literally everyone.

Perhaps, due to its specific flair and exotic origin, cumin has become one of the most easily recognizable elements of the Eastern cuisine and at the same time has settled in the Western culture as well, therefore, creating a cultural paradox.

Among other essential issues concerning cumin, its impact on people’s health and well-being must be mentioned. On the one hand, it might seem that such a seemingly insignificant element of one’s diet as spices can hardly have any tangible effect on one’s health.

On the other hand, it is essential to keep in mind that a human body is a fragile system which is subject even to the least noticeable outside impact. As claim, the idea that spices can have any possible effect on people’s health has been questioned for a considerable amount of time:

The importance of herbs and spices, which have been used as flavour enhancers since ancient times in different cuisines all over the world, is only beginning to surface. Spices as defined by the US Food and Drug Administration are “aromatic vegetable substances, in the whole, broken, or ground form, whose significant function in food is seasoning rather than nutrition (Bhattacharjee and Sengrupta para. 1)

Nevertheless, it can be still suggested that cumin can also possibly have certain impact on the way people’s organisms work. Indeed, if considering the work by Bhattacharjee and Archana, one will be able to make certain that spices in general and cumin in particular do have considerable effect on people’s health.

To its credit, one must admit that the given effect is mostly positive. According to Bhattacharjee and Archana, cumin can be possibly used of cancer prevention:

Results from a study conducted to assess the affect of cumin on experimentally induced forestomach and uterine cervix tumorigenesis in Swiss albino mice showed a significant inhibition of benzo(a)pyrene [B(a)P]-induced stomach tumor burden (tumors per mouse) by cumin.

Cervical carcinoma incidence was also found to be reduced in the cumin treated group compared with the 3-methylcholanthrene (MCA)-treated control group. (Bhattacharjee and Sengrupta para. 5)

Thus, it seems that cumin ha all reasons to become an important element of every single cuisine of the world; with its specific taste and the effect that it has on people’s health, the plant seems to be a truly miraculous creation. No wonder that jeera has entered so many world cuisines. However, to see the full impact of cumin on the world art of culinary, it is necessary to consider several cuisines which have been influenced by cumin most.

One of the most graphic examples of a cuisine shaped by the use of jeera is the one of Latin America. Although taking the entire continent to show the effect of cumin on a certain cuisine should actually be considered a major generalization, in the given case, such generalization is an absolute necessity, since cumin has affected a number of countries in Latin America.

To start with, the given spices have shaped the Mexican cuisine a lot, which Tainer and Greins emphasize: “Cumin, oregano, garlic, onion, coriander, sesame seed, cilantro, and red pepper and to a lesser degree bay leaves, allspice, clove, cinnamon, sesame seed, and anise are all used in Mexican cooking” (Tainer and Greins 224).

However, Mexican cuisine is not the only one which has been inspired greatly by the famous spices. According to Tainer and Greins, such cultures as the Puerto Rican and the Cuban one have also been inspired by jeera when developing their cuisine. A cross between the Spanish and the Mexican cooking, the given cuisines also use jeera as a specific enhancer of taste, making the dish unique.

As Tainer and Greins assure about the Puerto Rican and Cuban cuisines, “The ingredients in both are very similar. Garlic, cumin, oregano, bay leaves, onion, cloves, nutmeg, ginger, thyme, cilantro, cayenne, cinnamon, black pepper, turmeric, and paprika are common spices in Spanish-Caribbean cooking” (Tainer and Greins 224).

Therefore, it is obvious that the world would have lost a lot if the famous plant had not been exported.

Now that every single cook knows what this plant is and how to use it to make the dishes taste even more delicious, it I obvious that with the help of jeera, the world has a chance not only to taste the Oriental cuisine and make the Western dishes more exquisite, but also to explore the Eastern world a little bit better, and perhaps, even to plunge into the depth of the Oriental philosophy, with its specific pace and the specific thoughtful mood which the latter sets one into at once.

Once completely unknown to the rest of the world, cumin nowadays links the East and West, which makes jeera a part of the world history.

Works Cited Bhattacharjee, Shamee and Archana Sengrupta. “Spices in Cancer Prevention: An Overview.” The Internet Journal of Nutrition and Wellness 7.1 (2009). Web.

Boning, Charles R. Florida’s Best herbs and Spices. Sarasota, FL: Pineapple Press, 2010. Print.

Cumin Mandi Rates 2012. Web. Web.

Rita, Paul, Mandal Aninda and Datta K. Animesh. “Cumin (Cuminum Cyminum L.; Umbelliferae) Cultivation in west Bengal Plains, Kalyani, Nadia.” International research Journal of Pharmacy 3.2 (2012): 202-205.

Spice Encyclopedia 2008. Web. Web.

Tainer, Donna R. and Anthony T. Greins. Spices and Seasonings: A Food Technology Handbook. New York, NY: John Wiley


Immigration to the US After the Second World War Essay essay help free: essay help free

The nineteenth century was characterized by immigration due to the changes that took place in various parts of the world. People were forced to migrate from one place to the other mainly because of harsh economic conditions and political conflicts.

In Europe, industrialization forced people to seek new opportunities elsewhere, including Africa and the US. In the same way, the industries established in Europe, particularly Britain, attracted a number of immigrants from Africa.

However, the US received a huge number of immigrants due to its long history of development and business opportunities. After the Second World War, many people were forced to flee their countries because of insecurity and appalling living conditions.

In Italy, individuals were forced to seek refuge in the US due to lack of employment, increased population, and outbreak of diseases. For Jews, they were ranked the second largest ethnic group to migrate in the US in the nineteenth century.

After the Second World, Jews were forced to relocate to the US mainly because of the Nazi persecution. In Russia, the changing climatic conditions and drop in agricultural production forced Jews to seek refuge in the US. They were often victimized for poor agricultural returns.

The major problem that faced migrants was suspicion from the locals. In particular, the Italians were perceived as people who had come to the US to take up business and job opportunities belonging to Americans. They were often discriminated and labeled as the Chinese of Europe.

They were branded names such as wops, dagos, and guineas. This means that Italians suffered from humiliation and unfair treatment. Among the Jews, there were various sub-groups, each with its own interests. Those who migrated in the beginning of the nineteenth century had adopted American values.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More They had abandoned their traditional practices and adopted the modern cultural values. For instance, they had abolished their traditional religion in favor of the modern religion. A conflict broke out between traditional Jews who migrated from Russia and Germany and those who had settled in the US during the beginning of the 19th century.

However, Jews realized that they had to forge a working unity in order to match the dynamics of society. Those who migrated in the US earlier exercised control over the new migrants.

The major conflict that faced immigrants was ethnic conflict because each group had its own traditions and values. The conflicts were wide spread, which forced the Congress to enact policies that barred the immigration of foreigners to the US.

The Congress was responding to domestic pressure from civil groups, which claimed that immigrants were interfering with the living standards of Americans. The Chinese Exclusion Act of 1882 was still valid even after the 18th century.

Another challenge that was faced by immigrants was economic difficulty. The immigrants were accused of accepting low wages and offering services at a reduced price. American locals believed that no employer would offer employment to them since they demanded more wages.

Moreover, religious conflicts were the main challenges faced by immigrants. Some of the migrants practiced traditional religion, such as Shinto and Confucianism, which was inconsistent to the cultural practices of the US.

Even though the author of the book explains clearly some of the challenges faced by immigrants in the US in the 19th century, he does not talk about the challenges faced by blacks. The main challenge faced by blanks is racial discrimination. For instance, racial discrimination divided the American population into two. Racism is still a challenge faced by the black immigrants in the US.

We will write a custom Essay on Immigration to the US After the Second World War specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Use of External Sources by Students Essay essay help online

Academic honesty is expected from students when doing examinations, assignments and other academic discussions. Students are always expected to produce original work unless directed to do otherwise by their instructors (Harvey 132).

In order to find solutions to the various problems in their course work, the internet and other external sources are readily available to assist them in coming up with possible solutions to their problems (Harvey 132). Presenting any form of academic work to an academic audience requires adequate preparations and the materials presented must meet the required intellectual standards (Harvey 133).

It is important to point out that the use of external sources can only amount to cheating if the students use external sources without the permission of their instructors. Students should recognize all external sources as a way of appreciating borrowed ideas (Harvey 133).

There are some conservative tutors who do not allow students to use external sources even if the use of the sources is legal. This is not fair for students since it is not possible for them to know and remember everything at the same time (Harvey 133). Students should be allowed to use external sources in tests and academic presentations as long as they avoid plagiarism.

In using external sources, there are certain things that students are not expected to do (Spatt 34). To begin with, the word-for-word use of external sources is forbidden because it shows lack of initiative from the side of students (Spatt 34). Excessive use of external sources should not be tolerated by tutors because it encourages laziness and dishonesty (Spatt 34).

The use of external sources can only be justified if students obey all the copyright laws. The use of print sources has been overtaken by the internet and this has left many instructors worried (Spatt 36). Most websites are not reviewed compared to print sources. Despite this concern, tutors should recommend credible internet sources to their students to enhance quality academic work (Spatt 36).

Tests and assignments are vital assessment tools used by teachers in learning institutions (Spatt 78). It is not possible for students to understand and know everything without using other sources. Academic sources provide examples and evidence that support arguments in research essays (Spatt 78).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Primary and secondary academic sources should therefore be used in an ethical way to ensure students deliver quality assignments backed by credible evidence from external sources (Spatt 78). Academic research entails referring to other people’s work to build one’s ideas, theories and facts (Spatt 99).

Academic sources should be made accessible to students when they are doing standardized tests. Assignments and tests are important assessment tools in the life of a student and therefore being denied legal access to external sources is not fair to them (Spatt 99). Therefore, these tests should be restructured or should not be used as assessment tools.

Writing skills are essential in communication and language tests. Composition tests are meant to test the students’ writing techniques, and at the same time examine if their thinking is actually critical (Kapitzke 34). Compositions and other pieces of writing must always meet intellectual standards. Any form of training that does not allow students to use outside information and materials is bound to lack substance.

Positions taken by students when writing essays should have strong and credible evidence from outside sources (Kapitzke 34). Recent research indicates that the performance of students is poor when it comes to essay writing because their tutors do not permit the use of external sources (Coffin 155).

It is always difficult for students to remember all the facts about a particular subject or topic without consulting other sources (Coffin 155). A student can only be considered as information literate if he or she is able access and evaluate information from sources in a critical and effective manner (Coffin 155).

Ethical and legal access to academic information with appropriate application demonstrates that a student meets the required information literacy standards (Coffin 155).

Internet research has become very popular in recent times with many composition classes leaning towards the new trend of conducting academic research. Many publications have been done through the help of internet sources (Coffin 160). Although internet sources have helped a great deal in academic writing, the credibility of some of the sources is what worries many scholars.

We will write a custom Essay on Use of External Sources by Students specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is always a difficult task for students to determine which online sources are credible and useful. Some companies have commercial websites that they use to advocate for the issues they support (Coffin 160). These websites provide a perfect platform for customers to give their views about company products, services and campaigns.

Digital advocacy has become a common trend in companies and learning institutions (Coffin 160). Conservative composition teachers are always reluctant to allow the use of internet sources by their students because they always question the credibility of some of the online sources (Coffin 160).

It is always a difficult task to locate and understand information from traditional print sources compared to online sources (Davis and Mark 418). Some websites do not undergo editing and filtering which makes conservative scholars to question the use of online sources (Davis and Mark 418). Digital advocacy is an initiative that has changed the attitude of many people towards the use online resources.

Many students do not prefer the use of print sources in their academic research but are only forced to do so by their instructors (Davis and Mark 418). Information location, analysis and application require some techniques but many students are not familiar with these essential research skills. Research techniques are also very fundamental when using both commercial and advocacy websites (Davis and Mark 425).

Students can only become effective writers if their instructors give sincere responses and comments on their work (Davis and Mark 428). The task of assessing students’ writing assignments consumes a lot of time and energy but many people do not seem to realize this.

A teacher’s comments help students to always have the reader in mind while writing any piece of academic work (Davis and Mark 430). Students are able to review their work and make the necessary revisions if their writing is assessed on a consistent basis (Davis and Mark 430). The comments made by some teachers tend to influence students to write according to their teachers’ demands and not according to their original ideas.

There is a great difference between the comments made by editing software and a teacher’s comments (Davis and Mark 436). The tone of editorial comments plays a major role in determining whether students remain original in their writing or not (Coffin 171).

A teacher’s comments should be thoughtful and not abstract in order to make students make the right amendments to their work (Davis and Mark 441). Plagiarism is one of the major issues highlighted by teachers when assessing the quality of their students’ writing. The use of external sources is permitted in writing academic work but it must be done in a legal and ethical manner (Davis and Mark 441).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Use of External Sources by Students by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Students who refer to external materials and information in their writing should make an effort of recognizing the sources used in their work. Plagiarism is the use of another author’s intellectual material without any form of citation (Kapitzke 78). Plagiarism is a criminal offence liable for prosecution in a court of law if one is found guilty (Harvey 29). Teachers have a responsibility of teaching their students on how to use external sources.

Paraphrasing and in-text citation should always be used by students in order to avoid plagiarism (Harvey 29). All the sources quoted or paraphrased by students should be well documented using appropriate referencing methods as directed by the students’ instructors.

Some software has been developed to detect illegal use of sources by students (Harvey 29). The use of plagiarism detectors has become very common because it is difficult to identify plagiarism instances manually.

The content of a student’s work is determined by the amount of research conducted by the student (Spatt 64). The errors found in the work of a student should always be highlighted to help students rearrange their work in a logical manner (Spatt 64). The purpose and reason for writing a research essay should be made clear by teachers to make students write with some logic (Spatt 115).

Research essays are an example of standardized tests offered in schools and colleges and therefore a lot of effort should be put in training students on how to write research papers with intellectual substance (Spatt 115).

Academic writing is an activity that requires students to be very creative (Spatt 115). A quality academic paper is a combination of creative thinking and effective use of external sources. Students spend a lot of time and effort in locating information from external sources and this actually deserves some credit (Coffin 179). It is important to note that the use of external sources does not mean that students lack creativity.

A proper combination of ideas from other people with a student’s own creativity enables students to come up with quality academic papers (Coffin 179). It is therefore advisable for students to only use external sources when necessary to prevent people from questioning their creativity. The reasons for using external sources vary from one student to another (Coffin 2002).

The first reason for using external sources is to get a widely accepted definition of words. Using external sources to come up with credible and acceptable definitions of words does not redefine the word but only shows that the definition is credible (Coffin 202).

Students who use external sources should quote and cite the borrowed information as a way of giving credit to original authors (Kapitzke 79). Citation styles such as Harvard, APA and MLA are commonly used in recognizing the works of other people. A reference list should be included at the end of every academic paper to show all details about the external sources used in the paper.

Academic research is very involving and the use of other people’s ideas is almost inevitable (Kapitzke 79). Success in using external sources depends on how students express the ideas of other people in their work (Kapitzke 79). The statements made by students should be recognized by the system. Reproducing other people’s ideas is not acceptable in any way.

Students are expected to express other people’s ideas in their own way (Kapitzke 89). It is important for students to first of all read and understand other people’s ideas for them to express the ideas in their own words without reproducing the original ideas. Superficial rephrasing of other people’s ideas only happens when students fail to read and understand the original author’s ideas (Kapitzke 89).

Paraphrases, summaries and quotation are very useful in giving academic papers the required sparkle and power (Kapitzke 145). External sources enrich the thinking of students and give them the power to present quality arguments. It is also important for students to evaluate the sources they intend to use in their writing to ensure that it meets the requirements and purpose of the paper (Kapitzke 145).

Proper organization and preparation enables students to avoid instances of plagiarism. Students with good note taking skills end up producing quality papers that are free from plagiarism.

The ability to realize when to summarize, paraphrase and use quotations is what makes a student to stand out as a good academic writer (Kapitzke 145). Effective use of external sources is key to coming up with quality and credible research papers. It is important to note that all cases of plagiarism are illegal whether intentional or unintentional (Coffin 213).

The use of external sources by students has always raised a lot of arguments among teachers and other academic instructors (Coffin 213). It is important to reiterate that that telling students to come up with academic papers without consulting other sources is not appropriate (Harvey 158).

The main essence of research is to use existing knowledge to develop new ideas. The ideas, theories and opinions of other people are essential in any academic research (Harvey 158). Writing academic papers such as term papers, compositions and essays is part of a student’s academic life and therefore need to be given special attention.

Instructors have a responsibility of ensuring that students are well equipped with good information retrieval techniques (Spatt 114). The ability to retrieve and synthesize information is an essential aspect of academic research.

The credibility of external sources determines the quality of academic papers produced by students (Spatt 114). Quality sources that have been reviewed and edited should be recommended for academic research. It is the responsibility of tutors to recommend credible academic sources to their students (Coffin 177).

In conclusion, the use of external sources by students should be allowed in schools to enable students come up with quality research essays and compositions. Advocacy and commercial websites are currently being used for academic and commercial purposes (Coffin 214).

The response and comments made by teachers on their students’ work should help a great deal in enabling students come up with quality essays (Harvey 156). Students should cite all external sources used in their work to avoid plagiarism by all means. Information retrieval techniques are very essential in academic research. The quality of external sources used determines the quality of academic research.

Standardized tests can only become fair if students are allowed to use external information and materials to support their work (Spatt 115). Students should therefore be allowed to use external sources it their tests and assignments as long as they recognize the used sources.

Works Cited Coffin, Caroline. Teaching Academic Writing: A Toolkit for Academic Writing. New York: Routledge, 2003. Print.

Davis, Robert and Mark Shaddle. “Building a Mystery”: Alternative Research and the Academic Act of Seeking. College Composition and Communication 51.3 (Feb., 2000): pp.417-446. Web. Retrieved from

Harvey, Gordon. Writing with Sources: A Guide for Students. New York: Hackett Publishing, 1998. Print.

Kapitzke, Cushla. Information literacy: The changing library. Journal of Adolescent


Kellogg’s Supply Chain Management Essay college application essay help

Kellogg’s incorporation of specialist transportation and storage companies to cater for the logistic aspects of the business is a good mix within the Supply Chain Management. This has helped in the reduction of distribution costs and also ensures that consumers receive goods in time.

Incorporation of major retails within the system assists in distribution purposes and also maintenance of good relationships with customers. Just-in-time system assists in the management of the inventory ensures balance is maintained at each section of the supply chain. This is done through efficient distribution system brought about by the relocation of warehouses (Kotler and Keller, 2007).

There is elaborate restriction on companies within the supply chain allowing them to concentrate within their line of specialization. Also the incorporation of computerized warehousing enables efficient manufacturing and distribution of products, eliminating the sense of delay.

Kellogg’s organization within the supply chain ensures easy identification and implementation of necessary solutions towards marketing opportunities. The idea of incorporating appropriate computerized measuring tools assists them in the process of gaining full control of supply chain.

This has enabled the company to easily partner with efficient retailers, technology and processes towards improvement of competitive advantages (Godsell et al, 2006).

Improvement can be made in the management of inventories within the supply chain. This requires involvement of adequate technological processes and incorporates proper management of supplies from manufacturing processes to delivery.

Implementation of right kind of inventory determines profitability levels, since inventory velocity plays integral role in the success any business (Kotler and Keller, 2007). At the same time efficiency can be reinforced within manufacturing by the use of Business Score Card which assists in making important changes within human resource and manufacturing.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This implies that the overall efficiency of the processes should be improved by more than 10%. Besides focusing on quality expectations from consumers, the various aspects of production should encompass cost of production and nature of delivery. The use of supply chain order matrix should be implemented to reveal the real nature of the company’s organization (Godsell et al, 2006).

Table1: Supply chain Order Matrix

Metrics Reliability Responsiveness Flexibility Cost Assets Perfect Order Fulfilment z Order fulfilment Cycle time z Upside Supply Chain flexibility z Upside Supply Chain Adaptability z Downside Supply Chain Adaptability z SCM Cost z Cost of Goods Sold Z Cash-to-Cash Cycle Time z Return on Supply Chain Fixed Assets z Return on Working Capital z Importance of companies like Kellogg’s in building good relationships with businesses in the tertiary sector

Big companies such as Kellogg’s operate under influence of central management for the purposes of capturing national and global markets. Kellogg’s require good relations within the tertiary sector since Supply chain management comprises of various activities from operations, marketing management, economics and logistics of which needs other parties for full implementation of the supply cycle (Hagel and Brown, 2005).

There are considerable sources of competition within the food industry from established companies. This has been enhanced through improved technology and the rising demand for quality goods. There is tremendous shift of power downstream where much focus is set on end-users of the manufactured products (Kotler and Keller, 2007).

It is easier for Kellogg’s to satisfy consumer needs by reaching them through the various distribution channels such as supermarkets. Hence every process undertaken by Kellogg’s should focus on customer satisfaction.

In order to address competitive issues there is need for integration and coordination of supply chains at tertiary level. It is also easier to evaluate various consumers’ challenges and their effects within organizations at tertiary level (Kotler and Keller, 2007).

Relationship at tertiary level assists in the creation of foundation, where the organization is capable of initiating appropriate mobilization of right resources. Pull models created in the process of supplying products assists in addressing increasing uncertainties.

We will write a custom Essay on Kellogg’s Supply Chain Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There is possibility of improving the level of creativity based on the knowledge of local participants enabling elaborate satisfaction of immediate needs (Hagel and Brown, 2005). Incorporation of tertiary channels encourages teamwork, whereby innovative ideas capable of solving the rising demand for products are shared.

Pull models used by the Company at the tertiary level addresses rising opportunities such as supplying goods to surrounding supermarkets and retail shops. Tertiary outlets provide necessary services capable of treating consumers as creative entities with abilities towards solutions and creation of opportunities (Kotler and Keller, 2007; Godsell et al, 2006).

Kellogg’s should be very vigilant on customer centric issues since they become more demanding concerning their expectations, hence the company should aspire to customize their products and services.

Players within the value chain should form integrated network capable of providing differentiated segment products as well as upgraded customer services. Well coordination within the supply chain and responsible actions from the companies assist them in winning consumer confidence and trust (Kotler and Keller, 2007).

Figure 1: Level 1 SCOR model of the supply chain operations

Evaluation on at least three benefits for large manufacturers like Kellogg’s in handing over the logistical side of their business to specialist companies like TDG

There are several problems within supply chain logistics of multi-site companies like Kellogg’s. This at times remain complex, since there is involvement of multiple stakeholders across the entire enterprise. Such complex nature of the supply chain demands that some services be outsourced since extra costs are incurred by companies in the process of reaching consumers with quality products and information.

Such logistical activities range from determination of appropriate raw materials means of transport, manufacturing and process facilities involved in processing and incorporation of appropriate business components (Harrison and van Hoek, 2008). There is need for outsourcing logistical services for the purposes of maintaining supply hubs which at times remain in the verge of extinct due to the escalated operation costs.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Kellogg’s Supply Chain Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Handing over company logistics to specialists like TDG assists smooth integration and coordination of activities across the organization and throughout the supply chain. This allows for internal and external integration of management creating the relevance of differentiating the role of supplier and supply management practices.

Delegating the logistical side of the business enables the company to concentrate specifically in manufacturing activities. Elimination of such costs also contributes towards profit margin (Harrison and van Hoek, 2008). Outsourcing logistical side helps in leveraging the company’s global presence and at the same time benefit from synergies within its premises.

At the same time enabling provision of opportunities through which appropriate models capable of delivering results within the supply chain are initiated. The resulting specialization and division of activities within multiple locations makes operations easier and improves efficiency.

Such mode of operations results into reliance on provisions from the end markets (Harrison and van Hoek, 2008). The element of logistics can also be used in determining potential partners within supply chain and at the same time assists in the development of crucial processes with ultimate response to consumer requirements.

Supply chain management should be considered as an essential component of multi-national businesses. However, this should be related to company’s strategy concepts. Outsourcing logistics enables effectiveness within the supply chain assisting in elimination of uncertainties which makes the company comply with various adaptive processes within the changing environment.

The idea also enables easier participation in community development programs which gives clear indication of Kellogg’s approach to Corporate Social Responsibility. Consumers are currently identifying with companies that are environmentally sensitive. Increase in the percentage of sales within the various market segments indicates high level of customer satisfaction based on quality and prices.

Key elements of the marketing mix showing how an organization can improve its overall marketing strategy

Competitive strategy within the company should focus on providing customers with superior products through their outlets. Such strategy can be reinforced by use of modern technology which makes it possible for customers to confidently follow respective deliveries. Development of brand image grants the company a strong position on the global market, hence capable of controlling a considerable market share.

Application of good public relations within the market is an added advantage since there is an assurance of good coordination between customers and the organization. This can be done through internet and other digital communication services which prove advantageous within competitive market environment where majority of the players apply modern technology (Kotler and Keller, 2007).

The target market has to be defined appropriately for the realization of effective results. Service companies like TNT targets household and office deliveries within the global market, and this has made them upgrade their supply chain for consumer conveniences (Kotler and Keller, 2007).

Customer centric measures such as lead times, on-time delivery services, and customer index and consumer satisfaction levels can uniformly be identified through the use of BSC system

Product strategy requires that the product offered should be capable of satisfying current consumer needs. For service companies marketing should be based on relationship and value. Such distinctions are based on defined qualities such as intangibility, inseparability and heterogeneity.

The nature of competition within food and beverage industry demands production of high quality products in line with consumer needs. Excellent services within target markets ensure that customers maintain their loyalty to company products for fairly longer time. However, it is often easier to satisfy consumer needs when the markets are sub-divided into segments.

This would also determine the kind of machineries used for monitoring and delivery purposes. Wider market coverage is done through multichannel distribution (Omera and Bernard, 2007). Positioning of a strong brand within the market place, like McDonald’s, enables the company to command considerably large share within the global market.

Pricing strategy is used by most companies in the process of determining consumer loyalty to company’s products. Nature of pricing applied by various companies determines the percentage of consumer base they are able to attract.

Pricing methods normally used in the market place include; geographical, psychological, zone pricing amongst others. Companies such as TNT adopted the use of segmentation pricing for their services, whereby services are priced based on distance and nature of the products on delivery (Kotler and Keller, 2007).

Reference List Godsell, J, Harrison, A, Emberson, C


Case Analysis: Starbucks Report (Assessment) essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Starbucks’ Challenges in Venturing Indian Market

Reasons for Expansion to Overseas

Benefits of Expanding to Overseas

Starbucks’ Core Competencies

Transferring Core Competencies to Overseas Markets

Starbucks’ Challenges in Venturing Indian Market According to the case study, lack of appropriate partner in India was one of the major challenges faced by Starbucks in its internationalization venture given that Indian market was composed of many small individual retail shops.

Selecting a partner from the many retail outlets was a big challenge because of their number and retail standards that did not meet the requirements of Starbucks.

It was a challenge for Starbucks to find an appropriate partner and co-venture to grow and market its brand in India because of issues, such as Starbucks’ working ethics and intense advertisements for the brand to survive the cutthroat competition from the other competitors.

Starbucks’ pricing was another major challenge in entering Indian market. Coffee costs at Starbucks were set at their best as compared to other world companies. In India, the prices must be lowered in order to compete with the prices of other coffee retailers, which may result in loss or little profits for the company.

Another major challenge was the rising rate of sugar related diseases, such as obesity, heart diseases, increased blood pressure and diabetes. Starbucks has been the target of many consumer health groups’ movements and World Health Organizations worldwide.

These groups have been campaigning against the high-fat and high-calorie products sold by Starbucks. If Starbucks products are introduced in Indian market, it may cause the increased cases of heart diseases, obesity and cancer.

For example, such Starbucks product as Banana Mocha Frappuccino mixed with Whipped Cream contains 11 grams of inundated fat and 720 calories. Consumer health groups recommend Starbucks to publicize the smallest cup size and apply healthier coffee shortenings.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The North Indian culture largely prefers tea so people in the region have little preference for coffee. Research carried out by the Indian government proved that the coffee consumption had stagnated at 50,000 tons per year, hence making it a challenge for Starbucks to venture into Indian market.

The purchasing power parity in India is too high, and this has attracted all coffee retailers to locate their shops in India, hence increasing the rate of competition in the market. For instance, South India has intense competition for coffee customers because the region’s culture prefers coffee to tea. All the coffee shops in the country are targeting the southern market, thereby having prompted a fierce competition.

For Starbucks to survive in the southern market, it will be forced to enter it with a price below the existing market prices in order to attract some customer. This may make Starbucks operate at negative profits for some time, thereby posing it as a challenge to the company.

For example, the amount of coffee consumption in South India was estimated to be 39%, while that of North India was 15%, showing how intense competition for coffee will be focused on Southern Indian market.

Indian market lacks operation efficiency in terms of operation costs. Northern Indians have very different tastes and preferences when compared with the Southern Indians in terms of coffee consumption.

This factor will force Starbucks to offer a product made to suit both regions; Northern Indians believe prefer instant coffee for its convenience while Southern Indians believe that constant coffee has chicory so filter coffee is the best.

Reasons for Expansion to Overseas Starbucks has pursued overseas expansion to avert competitors from dominating or identifying the market prior to it, thus the company develops the western brand in other continents to ensure its advantage of the growing demand for coffee in other countries.

We will write a custom Assessment on Case Analysis: Starbucks specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Additionally, it has reduced its operating costs, and diversified its business risk and self-protection. These are some of the reasons that have propelled Starbucks’ venture in oversees market.

Starbucks has entered the overseas markets to expand its markets and raise its sales, thereby increasing the company’s profits. For example, Starbucks chose to expand to India because India has a large potential market for the products offered by the firm, such as coffee.

The population of India stands at more than 1 billion people with an annual growth of 6%. When Starbucks expands to international markets, it gets a chance to make its contribution to trade related issues in the international business.

Starbucks expands to international markets to reduce its operating costs. Starbucks identifies the resources it needs and the place where it can get them at the lowest cost in the international market. Companies move to international markets to take advantage of the low labor, production and transportation costs.

For example, Starbucks moved to Japan because Japan was the third largest coffee exporter in the world. This meant that the operating costs for the company were reduced due to the low purchasing costs.

Companies diversify to spread their market evenly in different locations. The economic effects of inflation, deflation or change in trade policies of one country that the company invests in will have little impact on the company’s cash inflows.

Starbucks diversification helps in reducing or eliminating the interdependence of the US markets on each other, and as a result, a negative shift in the economy does not cripple the company’s operations.

Companies expand to overseas markets for self-protective reasons, which are to guard themselves against their potential business rivals or to gain competitive advantage. By Starbucks having moved to international markets, the company has aimed at exploring markets that are less competitive.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Case Analysis: Starbucks by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Consequently, the firm has used the income gained to finance the shops in competitive markets. Starbucks has reduced the competitive pressure from other New York coffee sellers by moving to the overseas markets.

Benefits of Expanding to Overseas Expanding to overseas markets has helped Starbucks accelerate its growth. Due to venturing in overseas market, Starbucks has opened approximately 8,330 coffee outlets. This has been made possible because of the quality services that the firm offers to its customers and the increased demand for its coffee.

Starbucks has also accelerated its growth through attracting many business partners and ventures all over its overseas businesses. Another benefit gained by Starbucks from expansion to overseas markets is that the company has created brand loyalty among its customers. Its potential and upcoming customers are in a position to enjoy their favorite coffee brand at different regions of the world.

This makes Starbucks retain its customers because the firm does not have to keep on changing its coffee brand once it changes its location to India. Overseas investments have contributed to the ability of the firm to diversify the stream of revenue.

Starbucks enjoys the high revenues share generated by its ventures located in different regions outside New York. For example, Starbucks is receiving profits from its shops located in Japan and China.

Starbuck expansions in overseas markets benefit the firm since it outsources marketing strategies used in different regions and applies them in its local markets.

Local resources are used to improve the international markets while international strategies are used in improving local markets to win over more customers, gaining a competitive advantage over other local companies.

International opportunities give Starbucks more exposure and experience in marketing and production; for example, skills gained in Japan can be used to improve China’s market, and vice versa.

Starbucks’ Core Competencies Starbucks’ main competencies are focus on quality, exceptional customer service, incessant product improvement, concern for its workforce, and its drive to expand to new markets. From the inauguration at Starbucks, Schultz’ focus has been on offering freshly roasted and poured coffee of high quality, and customers have appreciated it.

To ensure the quality was maintained, Shultz discovered that smoking and foxy smells could change the taste and quality of the coffee, thus it is forbidden to smoke in coffee shops or the employees are not allowed to use full-flavored perfumes.

Starbucks has the competence of diversifying and creating new ventures in different locations. The firm created HP (in-store CD burning), Pepsi Company (bottled Frappucino drinks), Kraft Foods Corporation and Dreyer’s (Starbucks Ice Cream). In India, Starbucks has identified Tata Beverages to collaborate with to expand its product line.

Through these partners, Starbucks manages to reach different markets and grow rapidly. For example, Starbucks opened 50 shops through partnerships and joint venture outlets in China, and in Japan, it has added 360 more shops as result.

Starbucks has an idea to locate a coffee shop on every building with easy access by every customer. In Boston, Starbucks had opened 24 coffee outlets because the company believed in locating coffee shops in the same region. This tactic allowed Starbucks to colonize a certain region, consequently eliminating the competitors and growing customer loyalty.

Starbucks has the competence of diversifying its products and customizing it to meet the needs, demands and preferences of certain region and customers. In some regions, people prefer hot coffee, while in others there is an increased demand for cold coffee because of the weather, and customers’ tastes and preferences.

Starbucks offers hot drinks in four different cup sizes, namely, short with 8 oz., Grande with 16 oz., Venti with 20 oz. and tall with 12 oz. On the other hand, cold drinks are offered in three different cup sizes; iced tall-12 oz., iced grande-16 oz. and iced venti-24 oz. In addition, Starbucks introduced Frappuccino, a frozen drink prepared from low-fat milk, coffee, ice and sugar.

Transferring Core Competencies to Overseas Markets Starbucks has managed to transfer these competencies to its overseas markets. Starbucks has used its competencies to select Tata Beverages as its partner in Japan and China where the firm has created both the partnerships and the joint ventures with businesses to sell its coffee in the countries. In India, Starbucks plans to collaborate with Tata Beverages as well to market its brand in the market. It has also partnered with Pepsi Company, Kraft Foods Incorporation and Dreyer’s.

In each overseas outlet, the quality of coffee has been maintained. Starbucks promotes selling coffee in its outlets. The company is against the idea of franchising. According to Schultz’s view and belief, franchising can make a company lose its culture, which is its strength in the market.

Starbucks teaches coffeehouse employees not only how to prepare coffee but also how to impart the company’s passion to its products to the customers. Starbucks helps its partners’ employees understand Starbucks’ mission, vision, objectives, targets and goals in business. In addition, such rules as customers should not smoke in the shop and employees could wear only delicate perfume are maintained.


Review: “World Trade Center” by Oliver Stone Essay (Movie Review) college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The nature of the crisis presented

Steps for alleviating the crisis

Coping skills

Developing resilience



Introduction The purpose of this study is to analyze the movie World Trade Center (2006) directed by Oliver Stone. The assessment will capture the nature of the crisis presented in the movie, the steps taken to alleviate the crisis and the skills employed in the rescue operations. The study will also assess the development of the virtue of resilience as depicted in the movie.

A crisis occurs as a result of an unexpected situation that is precarious and life threatening. In most cases, the cause of the threat is predominantly unidentified. The situation causing the crisis may result from poor system performance. Crises are associated with complex systems.

Simple systems do not necessarily cause crises. In any crisis set-up, an immediate solution must be sort. One of the characteristics of a crisis is that it occurs unexpectedly. Due to the uncertainty manifested by the crisis, it may cause a lot of anxiety to the parties concerned (James


Chinese Economy: Issues and Policies Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Introduction A country can stimulate its economic growth through different avenues. Some of these avenues include increasing government expenditure, stimulating the level of consumption, and managing its net exports. International trade plays an important role in the growth of a country’s Gross Domestic Product (GDP) for example, by increasing the volume of foreign currency (Wilson


Euro ‘debt’ crisis Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction European debt crisis refers to the challenges that Europe is undergoing when paying for the debts built and accumulated over decades of financial instability.

Five of the world’s largest economies including Greece, Portugal, Ireland and Spain in one way or the other have failed to generate a stable economic growth to cater for their debts. Previously, these countries only considered challenges caused by the crisis; it is now going beyond borders and is affecting the whole world.

Europe is currently facing a serious financial crisis; debts accumulated by the member nations of European Union have raised questions about the effectiveness of European Economic and Monetary Union and what holds of euro in the coming days.

Sovereign debt is considered to be the main cause of Euro crisis. However, most of the affected countries including Greece, Ireland, Portugal and Spain, and other smaller economies that are linked to Euro zone, have severe monetary problems (Lynn, 2010).

The root of the crisis was a result of misallocation of resources and loss of completion within these countries. This was after the adoption of Euro about ten years ago. Currently, the economic problem is no longer the cause of the crises but a consequence brought by the changes.

The worldwide financial crisis associated with Greece raised an alarm about the debt crisis that was facing the Euro zone. The International Monetary Fund and the European Union have attempted to regain confidence in the unstable economies of Greece, Portugal and Ireland. Revealing of financial situation in Greece raised doubts on its capability to pay its debts (Kolb, 2011).

The sovereign debt that had faced these economies has continued to threaten the international monetary fund in trying to save the financial market. In addition, the spread of crisis to bigger economies like Spain and Italy poses a greater risk making the crisis more complicated.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For this reason, a lot of questions have been raised about the effectiveness of IMF and European Union. This has brought doubts concerning the future of these international monetary organizations not forgetting the fact that recovery of these debts seems futile.

Before the start of the crisis around the year 2007, the condition over the public finances was strongest over decades due to promising economic situations. The worldwide financial crisis around 2009 hit the economic activity of European countries in three different ways.

It polluted the financial system and its connectivity; it shook the confidence in wealth and demand and infected the worldwide trade actions. General preview indicated that the sub-prime lending came from US, but in the real state, the financial bodies are large in the UK and the Eurozone.

Basically the remaining financial bodies of these areas have lost considerable value. The Euro debt crisis resulted from different causes.

Some of the major causes include globalizing of money; simple loans around the year 2006 that encouraged risk lending and borrowing; worldwide imbalance of trade; monetary policies concerning government expenses and revenues and bailing out of worthless banks using private bonds (Braga


The Water System: Rivers, Streams and Lakes Research Paper essay help online free

The amount of water flowing in a river system forms a tiny percentage of the total water. Oceans hold approximately 1370 million cubic kilometers of water, which reflect to about 97% of the Earth’s total water.

Seventy five percent of the Earth’s fresh water is in the form of land ice while most of the remaining percentage is found in ground water. The lakes constitute about 125,000 cubic kilometers of the Earth’s water while the rest is found in soil moisture, the atmosphere and rivers, with the biosphere containing the least amount of water on the Earth’s surface.

Rivers, streams and Lakes The words river and stream are used interchangeably in technical writing though they mean different things. While a river refers to a surface flow of water in a channel, the concept of a stream does not involve flow in a channel. Other terms used to signify small natural watercourses include creek, branch, burn and brook. Rivers are subjected to water loss through seepage and percolation into nearby aquifers.

They also lose water through evaporation. As a result, the ability of a river or a stream to survive is dependent on the balance between water input and water loss. This paper looks at the various geographical elements of rivers, as well as, their relation to other water bodies and particulate matter.

Water is in a constant cycle through various systems including river channels, ground water, lakes, soil and land ice. Oceans experience more evaporation than precipitation.

As a result, the net difference of water vapor is conveyed over land, where it precipitates as rain. About 30% of the rainwater finds its way back to the ocean through river runoff and another 6% as direct discharge from ground water. Some of the rainfall is stored in other water bodies like lakes and rivers.

The techniques used to compare rivers in the world involve an analysis of the size of the drainage area, the length of the main stem and the mean discharge. Research suggests that the global mean of the external runoff is approximately 0.01m3/s/km2.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The biggest rivers in the world are also known to have high discharges. They get their water from convectional rainfall in the equatorial region, or monsoon rains that are influenced by altitude.

Streams are classified as perennial, intermittent, or ephemeral. Intermittent streams can be either temporal or spatial and are mostly found in karstic areas. The ephemeral streams only flow when the ground water table is raised by episodes of heavy rainfall.

During this period, they reactivate various existing outlets that are located above ground, causing heavy erosion, as well as, deposition of large amounts of soil and rock materials.

Particulate matter in rivers Rivers run through different courses between their source and discharge. The upper course refers to the highest section of a river, which is marked by hills or mountains. The water flows steeply into the middle course, where the gradient is less steep, allowing meanders to form.

The lower course is characterized by level ground, meanders, oxbow lakes and deltas as the river reaches open water for discharge. The flow of a river can be either laminar, where the water flows at low velocity, or turbulent, where the water flows at high velocity.

Rivers are characterized into perennial and non-perennial. Perennial rivers include permanent rivers, which flow all year round, and exotic rivers, which also flow consistently despite running through a desert, like the Orange River, and the Nile. Non-perennial rivers can be either periodic or episodic.

Periodic rivers only flow in certain seasons after a period of rain. Episodic rivers, on the other hand, flow after an episode of rain, such as a thunderstorm. While periodic rivers flow for several months, episodic rivers may flow for a few hours or a few days or weeks at most.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Water System: Rivers, Streams and Lakes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Rivers transport various substances including dissolved matter, solids, such as igneous, metamorphic and sediment rock, and suspended loads, like silicon and aluminum found in the soils.

Rivers deliver about 100 times more rock debris to the sea than coastal erosion, though the rate of erosion and transportation varies for different rivers. The dissolved substances are added to the oceanic salt, though rivers have limited amounts of dissolved substances.

Examples of rivers around the world Rivers have many uses to human beings and other living organisms. They also serve a significant purpose in the ecology of wetlands. Some of the most prominent rivers in the world include the Sepik River, Mississippi River, Volga River, Zambezi and Mekong River. The Sepik River is the longest river in Guinea, with a length of 1126 km. It originates in the central highlands and drains in the sea, without forming a delta.

The Mississippi River is about 3730 km long and is the largest river in North America, passing through 31 US states. It originates at Lake Itasca and drains in the Gulf of Mexico. The Volga River is the longest river in Europe with a length of 3645 km. It is a crucial river in Russia as it serves 11 of its biggest cities.

The Volga River has its source in the Valday Hills and drains in the Caspian Sea. River Zambezi is the fourth largest river in Africa, extending for 3540 km from the black wetland in Zambia through Angola, Namibia, Botswana and Zimbabwe, before draining in the Indian Ocean from Mozambique. River Zambezi is a significant wildlife habitat for various animals including crocodiles and hippopotamuses.

The Mekong River has a length of 4350 km, which makes it the 12th largest river in the world. The river originates in the Tibetan Plateau and flows through China, Thailand, Cambodia and Vietnam. It has many rapids and waterfall, which limit navigation. The Ganges River is 2510 km long. It starts in the Himalayas, in India, and discharges its water in the Sunderbans delta.

It serves a religious purpose for the Hindus. Danube is a significant river in Europe. It is the second longest river after Volga, flowing for a length of 2850 km. Danube marks the border of 10 European countries starting in Germany and draining in the black Sea.

Yangtze River is about 6300 km long, which makes it the third largest river in the world, and the longest river in china. It flows from a glacier in the Tibetan plateau to the East China Sea. It serves the three gorges Dam, which is the world’s biggest hydroelectric power plant.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Water System: Rivers, Streams and Lakes by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Nile is the longest river in the World. It extends for a length of 6650 km from east Africa to the Mediterranean. The river is a vital source of water in Egypt, which depends on the annual silt depositions for farming wheat and other crops.

Amazon River is the second longest river in the world. It is also regarded as largest river in the world on the basis of its volume. The river is 6400 km long and flows through various countries in South America including Peru, Colombia, and Brazil. It then discharges into the Atlantic Ocean.


Sunshine Enterprises Case Study a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Current Quality Control System and Changes That Are Needed The field of management of operations that deals with ensuring that production and services are at the necessary specifications is known as quality control. Quality control is a very essential component of every organization that wants to develop a brand name that will be able to position itself in the market.

Sunshine operates in a highly competitive and sensitive food service industry and their final product can influence the way customers will react. It is essential to note that quality is concerned with putting the needs of the final consumer first always. Its current control system has several flaws which need to be checked or the enterprise will lose its customers in the long run. The areas of focus include the following:

Customer Satisfaction

It is notable that the owner of the restaurant chains has given some attention to customer satisfaction by making enquiries to customers so that she obtains feedback. This is very good in terms of making future improvements to her enterprise’s service to its clients.

However, she needs to improve on this area because her visits to the restaurants once in a while can not ensure that she has a clear picture of what should be corrected. Due to her busy schedule, she could employ better methods of ensuring quality always and not in her random.

Percentage of Defects

It is also good that the chains have a target of one plate per a hundred. However, this level of defect is rather theoretical than realistic. There are no means of evaluating this and maybe Abby thinks that by asking for customer responses she will be able to ensure that she attains this. First, her once in a while checks are not likely to ensure that this is followed.

Secondly, some customers probably would not talk but eat what has been served and walk out slowly and never come back. Lastly, the defect level of 10% that is their target is too high when taken into practice.

It means that for every 10 plates served in the restaurants, one has a potential of being defective which may mean not well cooked or having some extra seasoning among other things. Suppose a customer comes to one of the hotels and haves this meal, it will be very destructive on the image of the enterprise as there is bound to be some negative publicity arising from the customer.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Randomized Inspection and Supervision

Abby, according to the case, only visits after a couple of days to get the customer complaints and act on them. Her style of quality control is centered on responses after the customers already have the food on their table.

This is not the best means of establishing quality because she can not guarantee that when she is not around there will be a better service. Her method of using negative responses to gauge quality in her enterprise is very inaccurate.

Instead, she should be aiming at checking the food at the preparation stage rather than waiting for customer response. By assuming that she will eliminate such incidences through randomized supervision or checks that are one sided, she risks loosing customers since by the time the complaint is forwarded to her, the damage will be already done.

Unclear Channels of Control

Looking at the case where the customer has claimed he was over tipped, there is clear evidence that the enterprise lacks a clear framework when it comes to quality control. The billing system of the hotel is one that does not hold anyone responsible as seen by the number of possible scenarios generated by the manager.

The use of a third party credit card company that is not working closely with the enterprise is surprising. There needs to be a change in the way the hotel chains bill their customers so that complaints such as the one cited are not encountered by the management team.

The management of the enterprise should develop a billing system that is efficient in generating reports accurately and timely. The credit card company contracted should be of a high standard in terms of accounting for payments in a more conclusive manner.

Short and Long-Term Recommendations The enterprise has not totally embraced the essence of quality control. This is despite Abby’s appreciation of the fact that there is a great challenge in the hospitality sector because of its competitiveness and customer sensitivity. The following are some of the long-term and short term recommendations they need to take into account even as they are on a plan to expand:

We will write a custom Case Study on Sunshine Enterprises specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Getting Things Right at Initial Stages

The hotel management should ensure that the chefs are well trained to get quality meals always and not to wait for complaints at the table. Even as the food is already prepared, the waiter should never serve meals that do not meet required standards. The purchasing department should ascertain that the ingredients sourced from the suppliers are of good quality to eliminate wastage.

Quality Assurance Rather Than Control

The owners’ style of ensuring quality is not commendable. She should be centered on assuring quality for every plate served to customers rather than controlling quality as a reaction to the various complaints that may sometimes not have been heard. She should ensure that the hotel has a quality team put in place so that customers get value for every penny spent on the restaurants.

Collective Responsibility Rather Than Personal Responsibility

What management should recognize is that the issue of quality is about being collectively responsible. The owner should not think that by trying to enquire from customers on food quality, she is only partly responsible. The management should ensure that everyone understands that they are responsible for every single defective meal served.


The restaurant should be able to compare their service with the other industry leaders so that they find the best means of tackling quality issues in their own organization.

There should be constant research on the areas of billing, handling customer complaints, service methods and other areas that the enterprise seem to be lagging behind. By identifying with and integrating best practice methods in the hotel chains, defect and subsequently, complaints are likely to be eliminated.

Continuous Improvement

Sunshine chefs meet weekly with the owner according to the case. There is nothing on meeting with the whole team that comprises of waiters, supervisors and other staff. There ought to be regular meetings to chat the way forward on constantly improving service.

Through such meetings, teamwork and responsibility is cultivated besides the management getting to know what different sections of the enterprise would like to be improved so the there is a continuous quest to improve quality. Through this, the enterprise will go a long way in eliminating negative customer feedback.

Encouraging Customer Feedback

Quality is focused on customer satisfaction and, therefore, the customer should always be given priority. It is encouraging to note that the management of this organization has based their judgment on customer response.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Sunshine Enterprises by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, there should be an elaborate way of ensuring that customers are giving responses even without being prompted to do so by the owner or supervisors. Communication channels of such negative or positive responses should be availed so that there is a constant improvement and also issues are addressed before they become more harmful to the organization.


A Planning Issue in “Julie and Julia” Essay best college essay help

The issue of planning in cities is on the rise as far as the urbanization process is concerned. Urban development trends are closely associated with suburban sprawl phenomenon leading to overuse of territories. In order to solve the planning issue, two challenges might arise.

On the one hand, the sprawl problem can be solved by means of building skyscrapers, but this decision threatens the loss of rural territories. On the other hand, although urban development consumes land in a more reasonable way, it still produces senseless planning of the areas, leading to the loss of community and social development.

Inadequate planning is especially characteristic for large cities with dense population. Similar issues are indirectly concerned in the movie Julie and Julia where the main heroines are overwhelmed with the business routine and city conventions.

At the beginning of the movie, Julie Powell is meeting with her friends to discuss the routine problems they face in everyday life. They are concerned with the inconveniences of urban life, as well as the decisions about suburban development. One of the characters also inclines to the decision of demolishing the rural area and building skyscraper as an optimal urban solution.

The theme discussed in the movie correlates with the statement that “to [people] [sprawl] is the means of owning a house on a large lot and enjoying the convenience of one-stop mega-mall shopping” (Macionis and Parrillo, 2000, p. 110). Emergence of traffic and finance problems, as well as the necessity to move from area to another, creates social challenges to the community as well.

In addition, loss of rural areas, along with the construction of new skyscrapers and city centers, leads to the destruction of historically important heritage in the city. Extreme business of urbanized communities, however, lessens the importance of cultural heritance and, as a result, fewer people are concerned with the problems of socialization.

In the movie, Julia Powell works as an operator of a call-center at Lower Manhattan Development Corporation’s, and her primary responsibility lies in meeting the needs of the citizens. However, people suppressed with routine problems fail to understand the needs and problems of each other, which is the result of urbanization and lack of cultural importance assigned to the cities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More With emerging sprawl problems in urban communities, the question of urban planning comes to the forth. On the one hand, the urban community can be considered as a self-regulated polis with independent residents. On the other hand, the routine of daily life makes the citizens of modern cities helpless instruments and faceless forces.

Such a statement appeals to the discussion of the concept of urban power and control (Mollenkopf, 1992). In fact, the planning issues should be closely connected with social values and meet concerns of individuals, as it has been presented in the movie.

In particular, the main heroine Julia Child confronts the stereotypes about women as the members of the urban society. The protagonist breaks the prejudiced attitude and enters the male-dominating world.

The necessity for introducing social dimension to an urban setting is vital. In particular, the reasons for social disorder are partly rooted in city organization and development. In the movie, Julia Powell faces a challenge when she and her husband had to move to another apartment to be within easy reach from her husband’s work.

They need to confront the social pressure and change their lifestyles to meet the demands of urban community. According to Southworth and Eran (2003), “…inevitable social disorder would be controlled best by improving the environment” (p. 62). In this respect, the importance of residential philosophy is indispensible to shaping the social paradigms of suburban life.

What is more important is that the development of functional zones for citizens can allow them to strike the balance between work and pleasure and arrange their daily activities in the most efficient way. Before introducing city reforms, it is purposeful to discuss what problems a modern urban area faces.

This is of particular concern to time management, transport, and working office location that have a potent impact on the welfare of an individual as a member of community. As Southworth and Eran (2003), attention to roads and transportation systems should be enhanced because it influences the community networks organizations, as well as their effective functioning.

We will write a custom Essay on A Planning Issue in “Julie and Julia” specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In conclusion, it should be stressed that the planning issues closely correlate with social welfare of the urban community. Indeed, the inconveniences of urban life cause significant problems in terms of communication and social interaction. As a result, large cities can hardly be associated with self-regulating communities and a well-structured organization.

This is of particular concern to sprawl problems leading to destruction of rural areas and emergence of skyscrapers. In addition, urban problems also lead to unhealthy social response to city organization is in part the reasons for lack of good organization and effective time management.

Poorly organized systems of transportation do not contribute to public welfare and, as result, most of the city sectors cannot function properly.

References Macionis, J. J.,


Business Data Analysis: Etisalat Essay best essay help

Table of Contents About Etisalat Corporation

Data mining

Information obtainable from data mining

Unstructured data

Benefits of data mining


About Etisalat Corporation Emirates Telecommunication Corporation trades in the brand name Etisalat. It is based in the United Arab Emirates. It is a multinational company with operations in seventeen countries across Africa, Asia and Middle East (Etisalat Corporation, 2012a).

“With a market value of approximately USD 20 billion and annual revenues of over USD 8.7 billion, Etisalat is today on the verge of being numbered amongst the top ten operators in the world” (Etisalat Corporation, 2012a).

“Etisalat now has access to a population of more than two billion and its satellite network provides services over two thirds of the planet’s surface” (Etisalat Corporation, 2012b). In 2011, the company generated a net profit amounting to USD 8.7billion. This treatise aims to discuss data mining and how it can be beneficial to the company in retrieving information.

Data mining Data mining entails removal of information from bulky databases. Data mining helps companies focus on relevant information on their data warehouses. A data warehouse is a collection of information that supports business analysis activities and decision making. Data mining tools are software tools that are used in a data warehouse environment.

These tools aid in forecasting future behaviors. Examples of these data mining tools are query and reporting tools, artificial intelligence, multidimensional analysis tools, digital dashboards, and statistical tools. These tools are useful in day to day running of Etisalat since they simplify information that would otherwise take people a long time to process (Jiawei, Kamber,


The Importance of Effective Writing Skills in the Security Career Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

The writing skills are developed by persons along with developing the reading and counting skills. However, it is important to determine effective writing skills as a special category. To write effectively does not mean to avoid mistakes and proofread the papers and messages carefully. Effective writing skills are important to present the definite idea or information clearly and in relation to the concrete purpose of writing.

That is why, effective writing skills are important for any specialist, and they can be used within all the career fields. From this point, the developed skills and abilities in effective writing can contribute even to the security career because of the necessity to write many reports, memos, internal messages, and some types of business correspondence.

There are many differences between writing as a usual skill to present the ideas in the written form and effective writing as the complex of skills. Those persons who intend to become the real professionals in the security field are usually critical thinkers. They can focus on the most important information and avoid the secondary facts or pay attention to each detail in relation to the context and aspects of the definite situation.

Thus, the mentioned skills are important for writing effectively, and these skills can be improved with references to the regular writing. That is why, these processes can be discussed as interdependent. Writing a to-do list, it is unnecessary to use some critical thinking.

However, writing a report or an internal memo, it is important to present the information clearly, provide the specific details, analyze the facts, and be persuasive in the analysis. Effective writing skills can be developed as any other skills, and their development is beneficial for specialists because these skills can accentuate the person’s professional competence in the chosen sphere.

The work in the security field is full of challenges. Some of these challenges can be successfully resolved if the person knows the principles of effective writing. There are few professions which are not connected with any kinds of writing that is why it is important to learn how to present the ideas and facts clearly and concisely, avoiding wordiness.

The business written communication is based on presenting facts and their analysis, and the developed skills in effective writing help people cope with a lot of the associated tasks. Thus, it is unnecessary for the professional in the security field to become an expert in the sphere of effective writing because these skills cannot be discussed as the basic ones in relation to his specialization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nevertheless, it is significant for this person to be an experienced writer who has the developed effective writing skills in order to perform within the position successfully and cope with various everyday tasks.

As a result, effective writing skills are based on the developed critical thinking. The specialists who work in the security field can gain many benefits developing their effective writing skills.

The development of any skills is a lifelong process, but the abilities to plan the work, to outline the important items, to summarize the information, to analyze the facts, and to present the persuasive conclusions can be used regularly because security specialists write much.

Moreover, using the effective writing skills, it is possible to increase the general professional competence in spite of the professional field or career. Many persons begin to use their writing skills while working out their effective resumes.


The Health Policy of New South Wales Report best college essay help

Introduction Management is experiencing significant leadership transformations as attempts to make it a reputable profession continue to arise from various quarters. Leadership in all organisations is an important factor that determines the quality of services offered by various departments. This report explores the differences between leadership and management based on the recent health policy of New South Wales.

Definition Management refers to the use of work policies and professional ethics to run an organisation, management in nursing refers to the application of various management practices to ensure an individual offers quality services to patients. In addition, this also involves the application of management standards to ensure a person relates well with other workers and the public. Management is experiencing many management challenges that affect workers, patients and governments.

The impacts usually involve unnecessary expenses, delays in service delivery and poor services. This means that management does not only involve the performance of workers but also their relationships and delivery of services (Malloch 2012). On the other hand, leadership refers to all attributes that enable managers to perform their duties well. These involve the application of skills, experiences, knowledge and opinions that shape other the perspectives of other workers regarding management.

Differences and Similarities The difference between leadership and management is not obvious as it is portrayed by these terms. However, it requires a keen eye to identify these differences since they are almost not easily noticed. Leadership is inborn and cannot be derived through learning. On the other hand, people gain managerial skills through learning, experience, observation and training on various issues (American Nurses Association 2010).

However, leadership cannot be transferred from one person to another since it has personal attributes. It is necessary to explain that not all managers are good leaders but all leaders are good managers. Leadership is usually defined in terms of how an individual influences the behaviour, attitude and response of other people. A leader may not necessarily be a manager.

However, both leadership and management are important in ensuring that managers provide good services to clients and at the same time enjoy their work (Nankervis 2008). It is very disgusting to work under deplorable conditions and expected to deliver quality services. However, good leadership and management ensure that both workers and clients are happy at how their concerns are addressed (Northouse 2009).

The New South Wales identified the following issues as drivers of good management and leadership practices that are essential in improving service delivery in its healthcare institutions (Yukl 2010).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More First, it outlines the need to identify key features of managing healthcare systems to ensure they reflect the needs of workers and clients. Secondly, it offers information that will enable managers to develop suitable performance agreements (Hughes 2009). This ministry examined the need to identify cost effective ways of reviewing and managing the operations of the executive.

Similarities It is necessary to explain that both leadership and management skills are necessary to boost performance in the following ways. A good leader will always influence workers to do what is right and not what is convenient to them. This means that when workers are confronted with challenging situations they are usually unable to make correct decisions (Huber 2010).

Instead, most of them act for convenience purposes since they want to avoid being blamed. However, leadership skills enable nurses to make informed decisions and this means they will act according to the guidelines stipulated by this profession (Shaw 2009). Sometimes, it is necessary to apply reason in situations where there are no clear guidelines regarding what workers should do when they are faced with challenging situations.

Secondly, both leadership and management are inseparable from each other. Even though, there seems to be significant differences between these two issues it is necessary to state that they work together to ensure an organisation achieves its goals (Nathaniel 2012). A manager must use leadership skills to influence others to follow the guidelines stipulated by an organisation. On the other hand, good leaders must apply the concepts of management to ensure their influence reflects the overall objectives of management.

The New South Wales department of health identified the following management issues as relevant in improving management practices (Butcher 2013). First, it highlights the need to develop a performance agreement that will bind the manager with the organisation. The format of this agreement usually highlights the strategic objectives of all positions and the roles each person plays in fulfilling this goal.

Secondly, it identifies key priorities of all functions of employees and this means that there will be no conflicts in terms of roles and duties (Fowler 2011). Lastly, it shows the relationship between managers and priorities given to them to ensure all roles are spread across the board.

The document also outlines the importance of linking organisational objectives and goals to measures that evaluate the performance of individuals. It is necessary to note that every employee has a specific role to play in an organisation (Health and Human Services 2011). Even though, some of these roles may be similar employees are supposed to do their best and avoid gauging their performance with what others are doing.

We will write a custom Report on The Health Policy of New South Wales specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There is also a need to link management capabilities to performance agreement to ensure all employees work towards fulfilling their promises. Agreements are usually established to make sure people follow guidelines that direct them towards achieving their goals.

Therefore, it is necessary that leaders and managers must always refer to their performance agreements to ensure they maintain their focus (Nies 2010). The New South Wales health department highlights a need to finalise performance agreements to ensure that all employees have signed their contracts and that they are guided by their written submissions to perform exemplarily.

Lastly, this department highlights a need for leaders and managers to conduct performance reviews and assessment (Melnyk 2010). This will enable the executive to monitor the performance of all workers and determine whether they are on the right path or not. In addition, there is also a need to review remunerations and contracts depending on how workers have performed their duties.

Comparisons with Other International Developments Brazil

Brazil’s health department had for a long time been divided into private and state owned organisations. This means that there were two categories of health service providers. Most people were able to afford state sponsored health services since they were cheap and readily available (Northouse 2009).

On the other hand, only the rich in the society managed to afford to pay for medical bills offered in private hospitals. Brazil’s healthcare system was largely affected by administrative and political issues. However, this country has experienced majo0r transformations in terms of financing, decentralisation, social participation and diversification of its services (Curtis 2010). This led to the formation of the SSAM (Complementary Medical Care System) and SUS that have become helpful in improving these facilities.


The changes experienced in Argentina are related to those in Brazil except that Argentina developed strategies to ensure majority of its citizens subscribe to various insurance policies. This has enabled the government to sponsor many programs through these insurance schemes (O’Brien 2012).

Reforms were centered on ensuring that health facilities have been financed properly to ensure they offer quality services to the population. In addition, the private sector has been incorporated in this department to ensure the burden of financing and managing healthcare facilities is reduced.


Canada’s health sector had also two categories of health service providers (private and state owned). People were could afford government sponsored health services since they were not expensive while the wealthy afforded to pay private hospitals.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Health Policy of New South Wales by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Canada’s healthcare structure was affected by managerial and political issues. This country has experienced serious transformations in financing, managing and decentralising its health facilities. Lastly, it has diversified its health institutions and incorporated private investors in offering insurance services.

Recommendations Nations have realised the importance of improving management in health institutions. Australia should continue to ensure that managers are well equipped to run these facilities. However, the following issues need to be addressed to improve its management of health facilities.

First, it should adopt an elaborate selection criterion for managers to include applicants from corporate sectors just like how Canada and Brazil did. Management should not be left to few individuals since other professions can offer relevant experience and expertise regarding management.

Secondly, Australia should adopt transparency in managing its institutions to ensure funds and other resources are used well. In addition, restructuring of these institutions should also involve other junior members since they are all part of this profession. In addition, nations should conduct wide needs assessment analysis to establish the best ways of restructuring this profession.

This will enable them to identify various weaknesses that hinder their facilities from achieving their goals. In addition, this will give them opportunities to develop plans that will ensure they have adequate measures to address challenges that managers face in their operations. It is also important that Australia’s health departments collaborate with private ones to enable them to deliver their services effectively.

Other related departments can include the ethics and anti-corruption and human, communication and transport. In addition, the inclusion of technology based approaches in offering various medical services is necessary to ensure health services correspond with the needs of the population. Brazil and Canada have a good communication channel between different departments within and outside health institutions which should be adopted by Australia.

Conclusion Management and leadership skills are necessary in all organisations to ensure there are order, coordination and understanding among various departments. This means that an organisation must center its activities on improving its management to ensure it realises its objectives. This essay has highlighted the differences and similarities between leadership and management. In addition, it has evaluated the effectiveness of the reforms proposed and conducted by the department of health of New South Wales.

References American Nurses Association. (2010). Nursing’s Social Policy Statement: The Essence of the Profession. New York: American Nurses Association.

Butcher, C. (2013). Executive Performance Management. New York: NSW Government Health.

Curtis, M. (2010). Ethics in Nursing: Cases, Principles, and Reasoning. New York: Oxford University Press.

Fowler, M. (2011). Guide to Code of Ethics for Nurses: Interpretation and Application. New York: Nurse Books.

Health and Human Services. (2011). U.S. Department of Health and Human Services: Strategic Plan. Washington: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.

Huber, D. (2010). Leadership and Nursing Care Management. New York: Saunders.

Hughes, O. (2009). Public Management and Administration. New York: Palgrave Macmillian.

Malloch, K. (2012). Leadership in Nursing Practice. Massachusetts: Jones and Bartlett Learning.

Melnyk, M. (2010). Evidence-Based Practice in Nursing and Healthcare: A Guide to Best Practice. New York: Oxford University Press.

Nankervis, A.(2008). Human Resource Management: Strategies and Processes. Melbourne: Thomson.

Nathaniel, A. (2012). Ethics and Issues in Contemporary Nursing. Boston: Delmar Cengage Learning.

Nies, M. (2010). Community/ Public Health Nursing: Promoting the Health of Populations. New York: Saunders Publishing.

Northouse, P. (2009). Leadership: Theory and practice. California: Sage.

O’Brien, T. (2012). Reforming the Irish Health System: Current Issues. Boston: Delmar Cengage Learning.

Shaw, C. D. (2009). A background for national quality policies in health systems Copenhagen: World Health Organization.

Yukl, G. (2010). Leadership in organizations. New Jersey: Person- Prentice Hall.


The state of the economy in a business sector Case Study argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Executive Summary

Economic state

Macroeconomic concerns

Assumptions and factors

Recommendations to the directors

Works Cited

Executive Summary The state of the economy is a vital aspect in a business sector since it contributes to the progress of an entity. Currently, the economy is stable and will expand marginally. This will be good for our business which has a contract to import raw materials from China. This deal will not be affected owing to the manner in which it was drafted as well as the prevailing economic conditions.

Economic state The economy has been improving marginally after the recession. There are various factors that are contributing to this fact, such as interest rates, inflation and policies, adopted by nations globally to shield their economies (Itō 24). Nations have adopted policies which aim at cushioning their economy against stagnant international trade and the high cost of credit, making it challenging for businesses. Business is triggered by consumption, however, consumption has contracted owing to the high credit cost.

Credit is the key driver of consumption. Subsequently, high credit cost limits lending which reduces consumption. Owing to these factors, the international business being a key component of the economy is stagnating. Thus, the economy will improve marginally that will be characterized by a drop in unemployment, inflation rate and interest rates.

The above developments will characterize short-term progress. However, it is difficult to predict the long-term economic trend although there seem to be minimal improvements. Policy makers in most countries aim at shielding their economies from the impacts of high cost of credit and inflation.

This will improve the conditions in which we undertake business. Government will also want to boost consumption that can be accomplished by a deficit budget. On the flip side, such a budget may increase recurrent expenditure, depending on the nature of the borrowed funds (Jossa and Musella 58).

Macroeconomic concerns In America, the unemployment extent will stagnate or reduce marginally to about 7.4% (Bureau of labour statistics). The marginal decrease will boost consumer confidence. Improvement in consumer confidence is vital since the American economy is highly dependent on speculation.

he above progress will have minimal implications on the importation deal, which Blakleyovich Enterprise is undertaking. Nevertheless, such improvements will strengthen the American currency. Blakleyovich Enterprise’s revenues that are sensitive to an unemployment level will improve marginally.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The interest rate will be maintained at zero, owing to the unemployment rate. Consequently, there will be a minimal interest to pay for the credit acquired. The key objective of zero-rating interest rates is to encourage borrowing. Blakleyovich Enterprise’s profitability will continue to improve.

The gross domestic product (GDP) has been improving at rate of about 2% (Leondis). During this year, the GDP will expand at a rate close to 3% (US economic forecast). The expansion in this factor which denotes the gross national output will be indicative of an improving economy.

This will further improve international trade. America’s imports from China by far surpass its exports to that nation. The trade deficit is about $300 billion (Yankovich 98). Accordingly, there should be a higher demand for the Yen, which would increase its value (Hufbauer, Yee and Ketki 216). Nonetheless, the Chinese government has hindered the upsurge in the Yen’s value to shield its manufacturers’ earnings.

Devaluation of the Yen has ensured high returns for China based manufacturers exporting to America. The devaluation of the Yen will reduce the cost of American imports from China. In the above case study, the Blakleyovich Enterprise will pay a reduced amount of dollars since they will yield more Yens owing to its devaluation. Overall, the devaluation of the Yen has reduced the cost of its commodities. Nonetheless, Chinese manufacturers have been the key beneficiary.

The American economy has suffered significantly, owing to the poor trade balance. The trade balance has favoured China since there is a large market for its products, as such boosting its foreign currency reserves. The fixed price contract is a shrewd business move which will shield the company from the change in value of the currency involved. The dollar-yen exchange rate will change marginally, due to the policy adopted by China and the stabilizing value of the American currency (Mann,and Katharina 176).

Assumptions and factors The above deal seems to be safe owing to the manner in which Blakleyovich Enterprise pursued it. Its cost will not change and the credit facility acquired have low interest rates. Therefore, the change in Blakleyovich Enterprise’s profitability level will be minimal. In the above analysis, there are several assumptions.

The unemployment rate will not reduce past 6.5%, which would allow the government to increase interest rates. Increase in the above rates would increase Blakleyovich Enterprise’s overheads. Additionally, this analysis has assumed that the Chinese policy on its currency will remain the same for the foreseeable future. The policy adopted will have some repercussions on the trade between these two nations. However, this is unlikely since China wants to protect its manufacturers (Brooks and Warson 131).

We will write a custom Case Study on The state of the economy in a business sector specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Recommendations to the directors The decline in unemployment and rising GDP denotes the fact that the economy is improving. This is likely to translate into an increase in revenues for this entity. However, managers should be cautious in their policy adoption. The profitability of the Blakleyovich Enterprise will be stable or may experience a marginal surge.

The entity’s policies have so far been shrewd, but the entity should capitalize on the zero-rating of then interest rate. The interest rate will not rise soon since the unemployment must fall below the 6.5% level for any increase in interest rate to occur.

This will provide Blakleyovich Enterprise with an appropriate window to undertake projects which may require acquisition of credit facilities. Importation of raw materials from China will enable the entity to reduce its cost, however, it will contribute to the ever expanding trade deficit. Overall, the economic environment favours this organizations (Morrison, Marc, Jonathan,Wayne, Wayne and Jonathan 76).

Works Cited Brooks, Lucy, and Warson, Julie. China’s Currency: Economic Issues and Background. New York: Nova Science Publishers, 2011. Print.

Bureau of labour statistics. Economy at a glance. April 12, 2013. Web.

Hufbauer, Gary, Yee, Wong, and KetkiSheth. Us-china Trade Disputes: Rising Tide, Rising Stakes. Washington, DC: Institute for International Economics, 2006. print.

Itō, Takatoshi. Exchange Rate Movements and Their Impact on Trade and Investment in the Apec Region. Washington, DC: International Monetary Fund, 1996. Print.

Jossa, Bon,


Emirates Airline and Qantas Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Implications for Australian Businesses- Domestic Firms

Multinational Corporations

Implications for Australian Government

Relevant International Business Concepts for Articles’ Analysis


Reference List

Introduction Technology and internet has led to huge interconnectivity in the world of business. Additionally, the business arena is awash with cutthroat competition because of interconnectivity and the emergence of developing nations. This means that consumers have the ultimate power in influencing decision-making in companies.

Therefore, many businesses are looking for viable options to increase market relevance and to bolster their profitability. It is also crucial to note the ever-increasing accessibility to information. International trade has been growing upon this bedrock. This paper analyses two recent articles that touch on important concepts in international trade.

These concepts include globalization, national economy, and political decision-making, the influence of culture on international trade, and the ethics surrounding the conduct of business internationally. While it is crucial to look for ways to cut down on costs to increase shareholder value by looking at cheap options, it is also crucial to consider the stakeholders involved. This is the decision that Telestra Sensis, a directories company based in Australia, is grappling with.

The company wants to outsource and restructure its directories business to cut costs. On the other hand, Qantas, an airline company based in Australia plans to increase its competitiveness through strategic partnerships with an international airline (Emirates, based in United Arab Emirates). The content of the articles will shed light on the nature and intrigues of international trade. The analysis will also include a discussion on the most relevant international trade theories found in the articles (Kay, 1993).

Implications for Australian Businesses- Domestic Firms The partnership between Qantas, the Australian airline firm and Emirates, based in United Arab Emirates has the potential to have several implications on the domestic firms in the same industry in Australia. One of the preliminary moves is to go to boardrooms to assess the implications on a business from the competitors’ viewpoint and from the industry viewpoint.

The firms are likely to observe the growth of the deal and the results that Qantas is likely to register in the subsequent months to make a move. However, some may make that move even before the operations start after concluding that it will have a huge impact on their business.

However, considering the many routes that Qantas will now enjoy and the expected price reductions and ease of interconnectivity to other world destinations, the highly expected likelihood is a fall in profits of domestic firms. This may trigger a case where the firms look for similar deals internationally to compete favorably with Qantas. This will result in mergers in the airline industry and possible takeovers. It is also a highly probable scenario for many domestic firms to go under because of such deals (Financial Review, 2013).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Telestra plan to outsource a huge chunk of its operations to a different country may not resonate well with the locals. It may also not be favorable in the eyes of the Australian government considering the comments of the prime minister in one of the radio stations. The locals will most likely refuse to buy products associated with the company and opt for other substitutes.

This may have even deeper consequences towards the operations of Telestra. The company will spend so much money on Public Relations to ensure their image remains intact. On the other hand, the government may refuse to grant the wishes of Telestra. This will save the 400 jobs the union staff members are crying for but will have ruined, albeit not so much, the image of Telestra. Hence, it will have to spend some money to mend it.

The question that Telestra is facing is highly ethical. It does not resonate well with locals that a company they have so dearly associated with may use such bad language while addressing the issue. Additionally, the operation that the company wants to improve on is quite logical.

However, when companies want to make such transitions, it crucial to do it a sensitive way. Domestic firms may have a leaf to pluck from this unfolding chapter in Telestra long history regarding ethics in handling internationalization and globalization in a technological world (Goncalves, 2013).

Multinational Corporations Just like domestic firms, international corporations’ resident in Australia and beyond will have a crucial lesson to learn. The corporations may have to revise some of their strategies. For example, reduction in prices may not auger well with them as they may be forced to cut down prices.

Additionally, the cost structure of Qantas will be highly adjusted considering improving purchasing economies of scale: all these points towards a bolstered competitiveness. Hence, globalization and international trade brings about better and improved services for clients and has the potential to bring about innovativeness (Johnson, Whittington


Google’s Business Strategy Report (Assessment) online essay help

Google is one of the few global companies which has the privilege of being listed in the Fortune 500 list. The company has managed to maintain a competitive edge in a rapidly changing technology industry. The global market for mobile devices continues to grow, which will has a direct impact on the company’s operations in the market.

It is estimated that by the end of 2013, mobile devices will have been used more than personal computers and laptops for accessing the Internet. This shift in consumer behavior will have a large impact on the company’s operations. Social networks, cloud IT services and the demand for information will continue to increase consumer demand in mobile devices across the world. Google will have to prepare for cut throat competition from other firms, such as Microsoft, Samsung and Apple (Pettey).

There is an increase in the number of people, seeking different mobile applications and other mobile web support services. More consumers are looking for smart phones which have strong applications that can perform a variety of functions. Google’s Android software for mobile devices has been competitive in the market because of its compatibility with different mobile applications.

The firm will have to improve the design of its Android software to make it more capable of handling larger web applications that run on HTML 5. This approach will enable the company to compete effectively with other firms in the market. More consumers and corporate firms are gradually shifting to IT cloud services as their preferred mode of saving crucial data and information.

Cloud services enable users to access their files and information from any location without any difficulties. Therefore, Google needs to invest more in research and development to enable it to come up with innovative products in the market (Manyika).

Google’s strategic goal is to improve the competitiveness of its current products in the market to make them more competitive among consumers. The firm seeks to improve the manner in which people access information on different devices to make it friendlier to their lifestyles.

In 2011, the firm obtained Motorola Mobility’s patent for more than 12 billion dollars, showing the company’s intention to strengthen its position in the mobile devices market. The firm intends to improve its performance by making Android the most preferred mobile operating system in the whole world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It seeks to protect Android’s market share because it faces a lot of competition from rival operating systems, produced by Apple and Windows. The firm’s strategic focus is to increase Android’s market share to make it benefit more from advertising revenue targeting mobile users.

The growth in mobile consumer markets has made it possible many firms reach out mobile device users to increase sales in different global markets (Schermerhorn 206).

Google seeks to grow its profile in emerging markets which have a lot of new middle income consumers. The firm is going to increase its market share in these markets to enable it to grow its revenues. Asian and Latin American markets have a lot of middle income consumers with a high purchasing power who seek quality products.

The firm intends to build strong synergies with developers of mobile apps to enable more Android users to have access to useful apps. This will help improve the company’s profile in the market, thereby improving its competitive edge. The firm intends to build on its reputation in different markets to help it attract more consumers. The firm also seeks to encourage more users to develop apps on their mobile devices to encourage innovation and creativity (Schermerhorn 209).

Google has focused on making information more accessible as part of its financial strategy. The firm seeks to come up with new technologies to strengthen its position in the market. Google’s financial strategy takes note of innovation as a key driver of growth and performance in the company.

The firm’s management has initiated concepts, which will help it produce relevant products that satisfy consumers’ needs in different markets.

They hope this strategy will help the firm access more international markets to help it increase its revenues and profits. Google seeks to take advantage of opportunities in Asian, Latin American and African markets, to increase its market share globally. Its aim is to build partnerships with other firms to help it extend its influence into other markets (Bender and Ward 78).

We will write a custom Assessment on Google’s Business Strategy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The company has renewed its focus on research and development to help its stay competitive in the global market. For a long time, Google’s strategy has been driven by innovation which has helped the firm stay competitive in the market. The firm’s main source of revenue has been advertising though in the last decade, the firm has diversified into other areas.

The firm seeks to increase its returns on the large investments it has made in the last few years. The firm also intends to increase revenues it obtains from advertising by developing applications, which allow users to view adverts through their Android smart phones. This will enable the company to have different advertising revenue streams to enable it to improve its performance in the market in the long run.

Research has shown that more people are relying on mobile devices for web browsing compared to personal computers and laptops. Google intends to capitalize on this shift to attract more mobile users to adverts, carried through smart phones that operate on Android (Bender and Ward 87).

The firm has a favorable corporate culture which helps it retain employees who are technically gifted and competent. The firm offers a lot of benefits to its employees which motivate them to improve their performance. Google has a relaxed working policy which focuses more on results obtained. Workers have more autonomy when performing their responsibilities that has made its staff be more responsible.

The firm’s organizational culture encourages its workers to be more committed to their workplace duties. The firm has a favorable working environment which helps its employees perform duties assigned to them effectively (Mawhinney 89). Managers involve workers in decision making, as such improving results obtained by the firm in different work place procedures. This approach has enabled the firm to stay competitive in its industry.

Google encourages its employees to collaborate on different assignments. This helps to improve performance and results obtained from different work tasks. The firm offers employees who achieve positive results, perks and bonuses which strengthen their loyalty. This approach has enabled Google to retain its talented employees as well as save on costs associated with recruitment of new workers.

Google’s workplace environment allows employees from different backgrounds to work together to help the firm achieve positive results (Price 122). This approach has enabled the firm to have efficient operations which contributed to increased earnings in the market.

Works Cited Bender, Ruth, and Keith Ward. Corporate Financial Strategy. New York: Routledge, 2012. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Google’s Business Strategy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Manyika, James. “Google’s view on the future of business: An interview with CEO Eric Schmidt.” McKinsey Quarterly. McKinsey Quarterly Business Journal, Sep. 2008. Web.

Mawhinney, Thomas C. Organizational Culture Rule-Governed Behavior and Organizational Behavior Management. New York: Routledge, 2012. Print.

Pettey, Chrissy. “Gartner Identifies the Top 10 Strategic Technology Trends for 2013.” Gartner Newsroom. Gartner Inc, 23 Oct. 2012. Web.

Price, Allan. Human Resource Management. Mason: Cengage Learning. 2011. Print.

Schermerhorn, John R. Management. New York: Blomberg Press, 2011. Print.


Business strategy and competitive advantage Report (Assessment) college essay help near me: college essay help near me

When a business entity is well articulated and driven towards the expected direction, it amounts to a business strategy. In other words, a business strategy entails the process of formulating and implementing the set objectives in the most articulate manner. Therefore, there are various elements that support a business strategy.

For instance, an excellent business strategy does not lead to unhealthy competition. It should be unique in nature. In addition, it should embark on delivering the diverse tastes and preferences of customers without conflicting with the prevailing market competition (Kourdi 76). At this point, it is vital to mention that aspiration should not be misconstrued with strategy. For instance, to become the best supplier of electronic products is simply an objective and not a strategy.

A business strategy that has been adequately formulated defines the goal or specific objectives of a business entity. The limits for attaining the set goals are also outlined in a business strategy. A good business strategy should clearly define the purpose and needs of the business. It should be appreciated that a thoughtful process is requited when formulating a functional business strategy.

It also demands flexibility and a balanced approach so that the actual purpose and need of the business are clearly outlined (Stonehouse and Houston 103). The ability of a business entity to attain purpose and need is largely dependent on adequate information of the targeted market.

For example, the needs of customers should be given top priority when designing the end products. In addition, the purpose of products and services that have been availed in the market should be put into consideration when formulating a business strategy (Kourdi 76).

Due to the modern and dynamic market, it is vital for a business strategy to be relatively flexible so that it can conform to the myriads of changes in the business world. A strategy should allow space for modification on a regular basis because a static strategy may fail to be progressive. In a nutshell, some of the overall elements that should be addressed by an excellent business strategy include:

The main aspirations and purpose of a business entity

The channel that has been chosen for purpose of growth

The core reasons for choosing the given channels

The methods for executing the strategies

Modes of sensing, monitoring and adjusting changes

A case study of Dell Inc. reveals a vivid competitive advantage that the company has enjoyed for several years (Hill and Jones 149). The computer manufacturing company has successfully managed to meet the individual tastes and preferences of its customers by manufacturing computer products according to the specifications of their individual clients.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When customers place their orders at the company, they are also supposed to include their product preferences in terms of color, size, and even design. These specifications are then used to model the actual end products in the factory.

Dell’s business strategy is clearly evident at this point bearing in mind that the company has managed to meet the separate needs of customers without disrupting competition in the market. Moreover, the element of uniqueness has been brought out clearly since there is no other computer manufacturer who is customizing products for consumers (Hill and Jones 149).

To recap it all, it is vital to reiterate that an excellent business strategy should be in a position to meet the market demand and the intended purpose. When a business strategy is well formulated, it leads to a viable competitive advantage.

Works Cited Hill, Charles and Gareth, Jones. Strategic Management: An Integrated Approach: Theory. Mason, OH: Cengage Learning, 2010. Print.

Kourdi, Jeremy. Business Strategy: A Guide to Taking Your Business Forward. London: Profile Books Ltd, 2009. Print.

Stonehouse, George and Bill, Houston. Business Strategy. Oxford: Heinemann, 2002. Print.


E-Marketing in Tourism Essay essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

A Critical Discussion of e-Marketing

The Impacts Electronic Marketing has on Tourism



Introduction Marketing has been an important part of any business since it has a significant contribution to the success of businesses. Production and supply processes rely on marketing. Marketing can be defined as the process of introducing and promoting goods and services into the market.

It also entails influencing buyers or consumers to buy the goods and services that are available in the market (Haegele 2012). With the growing number of products and services, business corporations have been forced to come up with new innovations in marketing. It is on this basis that e-marketing has been utilised by companies to enhance sales. This has even been facilitated by the process of proliferation of the internet (Haegele 2012). This paper provides a critical discussion of e-marketing and its impact on tourism markets.

A Critical Discussion of e-Marketing Electronic marketing, otherwise known as e-marketing, is defined as the application of marketing standards and techniques through the electronic media, especially the internet. The term e-marketing is often used interchangeably with internet marketing or online marketing. Many scholars have researched and extensively written on the concept of e-marketing (Haegele 2012).

Numerous scholars acknowledge the fact that e-marketing generally implies the promotion of goods and services over the internet (Luar


Is Poverty Of Poor Countries In Anyway Due To Wealth Of The Rich? Essay best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Poverty in Haiti

The Historical Perspective of Poverty of this Country

Corruption in Haiti

Poor Haiti Governance


List of References

Introduction Developing countries are faced with various problems, the main one being poverty. Recent researches show that in most of these countries, the rich continue to be rich each day while the poor becomes poorer. Unlike in the developed countries like United Kingdom, economical imbalance is very common in the developing countries.

There is the class of the rich elites and the class of the illiterate poor. The minority rich in these countries own factors of production, giving them power to acquire even more wealth. This creates an economic imbalance where one fraction has a stronger economic power, while the other bracket suffers from poverty.

Several bodies including the United Nations and World Bank have come together with an aim of alleviating extreme poverty in the member countries, especially the living conditions of those living below one dollar a day in these developing countries. This has however, remained very elusive due to the leadership of these countries. These people lack the necessities that include food, clothing, and shelter.

The World Bank in 2001 reported that the level of poverty in some of these countries is one the increase due to leadership practices that are based on greed and self interest (Hill


US’s Economic Recovery in the Aftermath of the Great Depression Report (Assessment) essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Week 9

Week 10

Week 11

Week 12

Works Cited

Week 9 The efforts to US’s economic recovery in the aftermath of the Great Depression of the 1930s sparked a series of economic programs under an umbrella name, the ‘New Deal.’ The mission of the ‘New Deal’ was to: enhance employment vital in poverty reduction; enhance economic recovery to the customary levels, and to revamp the financial system to avert a recurrence of the economic recession.

To many historians, this mission can be summarized as the ‘3 Rs’ i.e. relief, recovery and reform. From these, we can delineate the mission a short-term prevention e.g. creation of employment, or long-term prevention e.g. revamping the financial sector (Jones 101).

Significantly, the dawn of the ‘New Deal’ triggered political realignments with the majority of the congress men shifting support to the pro-New Deal architects, who dominating the congress with their liberal ideas. This was to the credit of the ‘common man’ since they were empowered through different institutions and unions e.g. the labor union.

The realignments enhanced the formation of new coalitions across the board; the Republicans split into liberals, ‘pro-New Deal,’ and conservatives, ‘anti-New Deal,’ with the former merging with majority Democrats in support of President Roosevelt. In effect, President Roosevelt expanded his authority to rarely non-South, Democrat strongholds, consequently enjoying a massive support from the congress (Jones 102).

This new alliance incorporated novel programs to the previous program thus earning the name ‘Second New Deal.’ To the previous program, the ‘First New Deal,’ which was apparently a stimulus program e.g. the ‘Federal Emergency Relief Administration,’ they incorporated, for instance, the ‘Wagner Act,’ which boosted the labor unions.

In a nutshell, the ‘Second New Deal’ was an amalgam of several programs that forged cooperation among several groups/institutions across the board including businesses, labor, consumers and the government.

Noteworthy, whatever prompted the ‘New Deal’ (1933-38) was the preceding economic recession- the ‘Great Depression’ (1929-33). However, the program received a blow in the year 1937 owing to an economic recession; nonetheless, it was not aborted until the year 1941, when the US shifted focus to the WWII.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More President Hoover’s era (1929-32) was coincidentally an epoch when the US’s economy was in shreds thanks to an all time high economic plunge. In desperation to make amends, the president resorted to tax cuts, inflating others e.g. doubling estate tax, enacting new ones e.g. ‘Check’ tax on banks, and he instigated the congress to monitor the ‘Stock Market’ which prompted several reforms.

In the wake of the 1932 election campaign, the Democrats through their talisman, Roosevelt, used this as their campaign tool. They viewed these economic recovery efforts as a sham, terming them as ‘statist.’ Roosevelt sustained Hoover’s aggression further by blaming him for the economic recession.

This functioned to de-campaign the incumbent a great deal, a man who had resorted to letting his proxies actively involved in the campaign only to come later after sensing defeat. This was one principal factor the incumbent met his waterloo after conceding defeat to Roosevelt later that year. Moreover, his precarious handling of the ‘Bonus Army’ issue played a massive role as a roadblock to re-election.

One of the most two, important statements, the highlights of President Roosevelt inaugural speech, was “we have nothing to fear but fear itself” (Jones 100). With this, he was trying to restore the fading ‘American Dream.’ He tried to preempt the optimism that awaited the people under his government.

He acknowledges the murky waters of economic depression that impedes progress and feels that this needs to be tackled head-on. This drives us to the second statement in which he believes that the constitution is liberal and gives him the suppleness to explore new endeavors in case of a stalemate.

He says that the “constitution was very flexible about the approaches it would allow and that if things continued to be bad he looked for congress to give him the authority to take more aggressive steps” (Jones 102). The significance of this statement was the reason that the ‘New Deal’ program was initiated in an effort to stem recession.

The important ideas that president Hoover expressed in the dawn of 1932 elections were basically geared towards economic recovery. Hoover, a proponent of laissez-faire theory, believed in carving out a society that would be self-reliance for the betterment of the future.

We will write a custom Assessment on US’s Economic Recovery in the Aftermath of the Great Depression specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More To this he envisioned a long-term solution to the economic recession. In effect, he initiated the establishment of “the Reconstruction Finance Corporation” (Zubok 140), an agency that would spur economic recovery through lending loans to organizations/institutions e.g. insurances and banks.

Moreover, he initiated more drastic actions in an effort to reverse the dwindling economy. To this he, for instance; restricted immigration, and initiated expansion of Federal government employment base. One of his campaign manifestos included massive cutbacks in government expenditure.

On the other hand, Roosevelt campaign idea of supporting farm related programs underscores the difference in philosophy between the two leaders (Jones 103).

Unlike Hoovers’ hands-off philosophy, Roosevelt’s was a devoted type. Moreover, their sharp contrast in their approaches is portrayed by their take on tariffs design. As opposed to Hoover’s protective approach on tariffs, Roosevelt envisioned a competitive one. Roosevelt triumphed finally owing to a sense of hope his ideas instilled to the electors. Unlike Hoover, his radio voice was enthusiastic (Jones 102).

If I were to live back then in the US during the hard economic times of the 1930s I guess I would have given up with life. I would be thinking of shifting to a neighborhood nation in order to seek life sustaining jobs. As for me, when the situation turns to the worst I would throw myself to the streets and protest against the government of the day.

The US’s recovery efforts can be summarized under the rubrics that include ‘Relief,’ ‘Recovery,’ and ‘Reform’ also denoted as ‘3Rs.’ First, on focusing on the ‘Relief,’ the American government injected a lot of efforts in her quest to relieving its citizens against the agony that was destitute.

Following the economic recession, a sorry picture of malnourishment, homelessness and sicknesses were common. Doom and gloom hanged on the faces of its citizens rendering them a pessimist lot. As such, in a quest to relieve pressure off them, alcoholism prohibition was lifted, and people started taking alcohol in the open air, and entertainment over the radio and televisions took a full swing.

Moreover, Agriculture Adjustment Act (AAA), encouraged farmers through direct payments just for choosing to plant certain crops, as opposed to others. Furthermore, Civil Conservation Corps (CCC) created employment; National Industrial Recovery Act (NIRA) came to the rescue of businesses; and government threw their support to farmers.

Not sure if you can write a paper on US’s Economic Recovery in the Aftermath of the Great Depression by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Secondly, ‘Recovery’ efforts were fronted through reinstatements of initially redundant employees to their respective private and public jobs. Public Works Administration (PWA) created employment, and in the year 1935, over 8 million people had been employed in a diversity of professions. Moreover, oral interviews were done on former slaves a manifestation of a nation on recovery.

Finally, institutional ‘Reforms’ were seen where federal laws re-aligned to foster a relationship among organizations/institutions including businesses, labor, consumers and the government.

Indian Reorganization Act (IRA) came to being in the year 1934; tribal governments were re-instated; reservation lands were returned to the respective tribes, and Native American religion, arts, and crafts were encouraged. Moreover, National Labor Relations Act empowered employees, and Social Security Act (1935) took care of the employees’ compensation and assurances. In a synopsis, the ‘New Deal’ achieved both micro and macro success.

Week 10 The League of Nations was formed post WWI, and the sole objective was to avert a recurrence of war in the future. Significantly, prior to the WWI, America and European nations had been experiencing advanced civilization; infrastructural development, as well as industrialization, was at full fledge.

All this, in Europe, was destroyed bringing the economies back to their knees. For fear of a repeat, as a matter of fact economies had to recover from the shreds of war, it was important that the League be formed.

The benefits derived from the absentia of both the US and Russia from the League was that while the former was an outsider and she would have been viewed as an intruder to the European affairs, the later was still upholding communism and could not be trusted with membership. Germany was not allowed membership till later (1924) since it was the one believed to have sparked the war (Jones 117).

After witnessing the consequences of war that included the dwindled economies and lost lives, many nations resorted to peace campaigns to prevent the use of wars in the future as a tool for settling disputes. One such campaign fronted by the duo of Frank Kellogg and Aristotle Briand was the Kellogg-Briand Pact (1928), and this was signed by Germany, US and France.

While viewing the slides, the pictures portraying the Germans scavenging for both food and clothing elicit a myriad of feelings from the citizens’ perspective towards the state of the economy. I think they are feeling that the economy is down and reflect that they shouldn’t have entered into war.

In the aftermath of the WWI, the US forged good rapport with the international communities. In essence, its politics, culture and the economy expanded beyond the borders considerably. Importantly, the economy and politics interacted a great deal.

For instance, the US received debts from England, France and Italy ($2.6 billion), German enjoyed a loan facility ($2.5 billion) from the US, and Germany made reparation payments ($2.0 billion) to its allies. This is summarized as the Dawes Plan. Moreover, the US extended trade ties with Russia, consequently becoming its major trade partner in Europe (Jones 130).

Between 1920 and 1930, the federal government adopted changes in its foreign policy. Prior to the WWI, the US’s foreign policy was skewed towards diplomacy. To this they took advantage of their military prowess to involve in diplomatic relations. In the post-WWI era, the next decade (1920-30), many emphases were put on international trade and isolationist as opposed to aforementioned.

The US was slowly drawing itself into what would be the WWII long before Pearl-Harbor Attack by the Japanese. The enmity between the two was historical, and it was slowly simmering culminating into what would be the WWII. Perhaps that was the reason behind secret developments in contingency plans (1920s) by both states. Nonetheless, it came the Nanking Massacre (1937), maiming more than 200,000 US soldiers. In effect, by the time Pearl Harbor was attacked daggers had already been drawn, and the US was in WWII.

Of note, before involvement debate was a rife in the US, whether to be isolated or involved. Those who were for isolation were arguing that the US would better concentrate on issues that mattered to them most, economic depression. Moreover, they felt that a neutral stand would assure them safety. Some quarters were really shocked at Japanese aggression and hence thought of involvement. To this they argued that ‘Axis’ aggression would threaten their interests thus; pressure ought to be mounted upon them.

Prior to the WWII, states were utterly aggressive internationally. This, I believe, was prompted by the fact that they were desperate to make ends meet at the backdrop of ‘Great Recession.’ They wanted to acquire territorial gains in order for them to explore prospective wealth, and expand international trade. To them they believed this to be the remedy for depression.

As an advisor of President Roosevelt, I would advise him to pursue isolationism for the reasons that it was unfortunate that the war coincided with the recession hence; involving in it would worsen the situation.

Week 11 Apart from protecting free trade during the course of the WWII, the other motive that sparked US’s interest into the war was because it had scores to settle with the Japanese. The Pearl-Harbor was a reason enough for the US to attack. Its interest was further renewed by the Germany’s aggression. Moreover, the US was fighting communism which was spreading like a bush fire, preventing it from spilling over to them had it not been contained at its infancy stages (Zubok 159).

As opposed to the WWI, the second war was a ‘total war.’ This war happened at the height of the industrial revolution and different nations used this to test their novel technologies. Heavy artillery, helicopters and submarines, were among the paraphernalia that were used. Furthermore, the attacks were waged indiscriminately to all and sundry.

The Spanish Civil War attracted interests from a number of foreign countries. Their involvement was motivated by a wide spread phobia that, if it were left unrestrained, it had the potential of culminating into the WWII. Also, there was a need to stem both ‘Fascism’ and ‘Bolshevism’ ideologies. These factors divided the Spaniards into two: Republicans, an anti-fascist, and Nationalists, a fascist biased organization (Zubok 159).

The US was reluctant to enter into the WWII owing to the fact that they were in hard economic times and as such, they were weighing their financial potential. Moreover, the previous wars had curtailed their forces significantly, and reflected that they might be overwhelmed. To echo this, the US had been involving in material support to other countries initially e.g. Britain and hence; this eat into its economy a great deal. With this, they entered into the war later on (1941) to save on costs and take advantage of a weakened enemy.

US’s foreign policy between the 1930s and early 1940s was that of an isolationist approach for the better part of that decade until later on in the wake of WWI when it reverted to diplomacy. Prior to the WWII, the US economy had been a rollercoaster kind of economy with the better part of the preceding decade experiencing depression.

At this backdrop, they were a weakened lot hence they could not enter into war. Moreover, its initial efforts to explore isolation ideology initiated a cutback in military personnel to channel efforts towards economic recovery. Hence, there was a deficiency in forces to involve in war. Furthermore, family ties of its citizens with their mother land rendered US an isolationist. However, in the wake of WWII when the economy was regaining, and after Japanese aggression, it changed its policy to diplomacy.

If I were to advise on foreign policy just before Japanese invasion what I would propose to the president, would be no different. With a weakened economy, shrunken army, and imminent attacks on the US’s interests, there was no option but to launch the atomic bomb. This would ensure victory and instill fear to the enemies. The aforementioned reasons justify why atomic bomb came in handy there. Noteworthy, atomic bomb could not be used in German because of family ties its immigrants had with their motherland.

The WWII impacted heavily on the US’s economic and social fronts in equal measures. The economy shifted focus to military production. In spite of creation of employment, the wage bill was particularly low. The US was desperate to arm itself ahead of WWII at the backdrop of depression. The society changed as afro-Americans started getting better jobs; German-Americans and Italian-Americans were scrutinized, and Japanese-Americans did not get fair treatment. Patriotism was taught in schools (Zubok 159).

The Japanese-Americans treatment, though unfair, it was warranted for they represented a potential threat. The Japanese sympathizers would have waged war against the US if they were to be granted freedom mingle with the rest of the citizens.

Week 12 Post WWII era that commenced in the year 1947 was typified by psychological warfare pitting the two superpowers: the US and Russia. In essence, both boasted ownership of atomic bombs and were confident in annihilating one another had war emerged between them. This protracted state of political cum military anxiety instigated espionage between these nations (Towle 160).

I believe the best way the general public would have taken to deracinate communism was through public campaigns demonizing such ideologies. This would help to change the mindset of many, having greater impact than handpicking personalities.

Decolonization is an antonym of colonization (forceful ruling of nations). Decolonization conveniently happened in the post-WWII when all the colonial masters had been weakened by the ‘total war.’ The UN campaigned for this by encouraging autonomy. Importantly, in the post-WWII, the efforts to restore colonies were thwarted by the fact that allies were always lacking.

As such, most states in Africa and Asia gained independence. Consequently, decolonization fostered new relationships between the colonial masters and their former colonies. Moreover, some colonies realigned themselves in the US-Russian Cold War. In a synopsis, the international relations changed.

Cold war was a psychological war that was fought between the US and the Russians. This was instigated by an ideological difference i.e. capitalist democracy versus totalitarian communism (Lendvai 196). Also, there was sustained competition between the two nations on control of territories and the people.

To contain communism around the world, the US did use divide and rule method, and it also employed diplomatic relations in some instances (Towle 161).

Basing on the quotes presented herein that touches on Mao Tse-tung, the main threat synonymous with communist China were a nuclear attack. As such, the US ought to have explored diplomacy in order to disarm China. Those who were living between the years 1950s and 1960s, on seeing the ‘mushroom cloud,’ they felt haunted because this was a constant reminder of the WWII and its associated losses (cold blood death).

The Cold War began immediately after the WWII, and the main recipe here was possession of atomic bombs. All the nations involved had confidence in triumphing in any war thanks to the atomic bomb (Lendvai 196). Communism was getting out hand in the East Asia. Communism triumphed in China and hence assumed power extending aggression on its neighbors e.g. Taiwan.

In essence, Cold War spread in the Middle East and Central America. As a student in the 1950s, the thought that I would have harbored while being taught about the Cold War were that the world, just like a bombshell, were about to explode. The emergence of atomic bombs was a threat to world’s security. I would have felt insecure and lived in constant fear.

Works Cited Jones, Howard. Crucible of Power: A History of American Foreign Relations from 1945. Lanham: Rowman


Core Business Essay college essay help online

Core business refers to the primary concern of an entity. In economics, the core business of an organization is central to the creation of value. Core business is the primary activity that an enterprise carries out in order to participate in the process of value addition. Usually organizations shed off things that do not constitute their core business. They may prefer to outsource activities, which are not part of their core activities.

Global value chains refer to streams of production running across various parts of the world that improves the merit of a product or service. As raw materials move from the primary producer to manufacturers, followed by retailers and finally to consumers, its value increases.

This happens either because of transportation in a region of greater demand, or by the addition of functionality or form to the product. The value of products that have a global value chain increases as the product passes through various international processing systems

Non-equity modes of entry refer to the processes of getting access to markets without making an investment in those markets. In this sense, a company gains access to a market without injecting capital in any part of that market. The term market here means both as a seller and as a buyer. For instance, a company can decide to outsource the back office functions to another company as its client. If the two companies reside in two different countries, then the foreign company enters the labor market using a non-equity mode of entry.

The term countervailing power of partners refers to the situation where partners balance the impact that each one has on the other. This helps to calm down competition and to allow for successful cooperation.

The main attraction for contract manufacturing is lower costs of labor in the host country. For instance, China handles a lot of contract manufacturing work from Europe and America. The western countries are unable to compete with China due to low labor costs in China. The reverse situation is true for high-tech equipment.

Some countries prefer to use contract manufacturing to take advantage of high-end technologies in other countries. They give manufacturing contracts to countries that have the best technologies in certain areas. For instance, the US processes many orders for military hardware for other countries.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Service outsourcing became popular with the advent of the internet. It is the process where a company gives a maintenance contract to an offshore company to take care of its needs. The most common service that many companies outsource is customer care services, or services that requiring call centers.

Franchising is selling of the permission to use a brand by the franchise owner to a franchisee. The person who wants to hold a franchise usually pays the owner of the franchise a periodical fee for using the branding elements of the franchise. The franchisee saves on the cost of branding, and gets access to an established brand.

Contract farming is planting crops on behalf of a client. The users of this model include companies that rely on agricultural products as their primary source of raw materials. For instance, tobacco farmers receive contracts from tobacco companies because the tobacco companies cannot meet the demand for tobacco leaves on their own.

The mode of entry that generates the highest local value addition is contract manufacturing. This model relies on local resources. This means that for every contract manufacturer in a given country, there is a long supply chain within the country. Contract manufacturing ensures that not just the manufacturer benefits from processing, but his entire supply chain.

This can include farmers, transporters, makers of packaging materials and all the laborers that work with them. In this sense, the impact of one industry in a region becomes profound, supported by contract manufacturing. One factory develops a regional supply chain, which ends up employing many members of the community.

The mode of entry that generates the highest export earnings for a host country is service outsourcing. Service outsourcing is very easy to carry out. A company that needs support to handle inbound calls can sign a contract with a call center located in any part of the world provided there are no significant language and cultural barriers.

The cost of setting up an outsourcing center is not high. In fact, the only equipment that a person needs to handle outsourced work is a computer and an internet link. The rate of pay is very lucrative. The low barriers to entry make it very easy for these jobs to move elsewhere. While service outsourcing pays well, it is very volatile.

We will write a custom Essay on Core Business specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The loss to the US economy from the effects of terms of trade refers to a very interesting dynamic in international trade. Terms of trade refer to the ratio of imports to exports. The economy benefits whenever exports exceed imports. In the case of offshoring, the US sends work to other countries.

The primary benefit is that the American manufacturers enjoy better returns when they move manufacturing to other countries with lower costs of production. The problem is that this increase in the quantity of money that service providers and American manufacturers send to foreign countries makes the US more vulnerable. The balance of trade shifts in a way that can make the US a net importer of goods and services.

Income distribution refers to the pattern of distribution of the money people earn in a country. When the US uses offshoring to enable its manufacturers to compete in the global market, it precipitates an income distribution problem. Offshoring is equivalent to exporting jobs. Manufacturers find it more sensible to send jobs to other countries because American workers are more expensive. The net result is that there are fewer jobs left for US citizens within America. This is one of the costs associated with income distribution.

The main issue raised is that the studies fail to take into account the economic problems of offshoring. The US suffers consequences as a country each time a manufacturer in its soil sends work abroad. This decision may work for the manufacturer because it reduces the cost of production. However, the result is that the value chain leaves America.

It thereby benefits the country where the manufacturing takes place. Alongside the benefits of offshoring, it is important to consider the drawbacks, especially the macroeconomic costs. One benefit does not guarantee that the activity will yield full benefits for a given county.

The first thing that stakeholders should do to make offshoring beneficial to all the parties is increasing the volume of trade between them. The source country loses some jobs whenever it enters into off shoring agreements with any of its trading partners.

If the two countries can increase the overall volume of trade between them, it is possible to offset the loss of jobs in manufacturing with new jobs in commerce. Such an arrangement will make it possible for the two countries to enjoy their competitive advantage without undue fear of trade imbalance.

Secondly, the two countries need to consider how to expand the markets for the finished products or services. Since each country is playing to its strengths, it is possible to produce more than the sum of each country producing on its own. If the two countries combine their capacities, they will have a greater manufacturing capacity to meet the needs of an expanded market.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Core Business by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This will ensure that the country that is offshoring creates more opportunities in marketing for those who lost their jobs to pave way for the offshoring contract. This combination of synergies would result in an equally beneficial symbiotic system.

The third approach that the two countries can use to reduce the impact of offshoring is by having the host country offshore some of its processes to its business partner. This would mean that the country fulfilling the offshoring contracts allows the country owning those contracts to recover some of the jobs by providing the services the host country needs assistance.

For instance, American manufacturers use Chinese and Asian manufacturers to make some products. The Chinese and the Asians should allow Americans to establish businesses in their countries to offer services like design, hospitality, among others to allow American citizens to recover some of the jobs lost to offshoring.


Botswana and Its Political, Economic, Social and Technological Areas Report a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Introduction Botswana is a country located in Southern Africa which neighbors with Namibia, Zambia, Zimbabwe and South Africa. The name arises from the name of the major ethnic group that is found in the region known as the Tswana. Botswana has been highlighted as one of the most stable Southern Africa countries.

Due to mining activities undertaken, diamonds have made Botswana one of the wealthiest countries in the world. The country has a democratic government and is termed as one of the least corrupted countries worldwide. It has a population of over 1.5 million people (Kubuitsile n.d).

PEST Analysis The pest analysis highlights important areas touching on the political, economic, social and technological areas of the country.


The economy of Botswana is sustained by a variety of industries. Despite the country being half a desert, several economic activities do well and are responsible for the income generated in the country. The mining industry is a major industry that gains from mining of diamonds.

Furthermore, the textile industry brings a good deal of money. The tourism industry equally brings in foreign exchange by showcasing its never-ending culture and heritage to visitors. It is also recorded that the country suffered a budget deficit in 1999. It is noted to have maintained the highest economic growth rates world over. This implies that the country is doing well economically.


The Botswana government is very stable and enjoys friendly relations with many countries around the world. The country has enjoyed political stability over the years since independence while co-existing with its neighbors. The former name of Botswana is Bechuanaland and the capital city is located in Gaborone. The country has 16 districts (Zijilma n.d).


Botswana has a huge challenge of tackling HIV/AIDS which has proven to be a major headache to sustaining the human resources in the country. Despite the mining industry enjoying success, the rate of unemployment is very high and therefore the society is heavily stratified making the rich poor gap very high. It however enjoys a rich culture in music, visual arts, food and sporting. The languages spoken are Setswana and English. However, Botswana faced a huge housing problem in 2011(Denton n.d).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Technological

The energy sector in Botswana undertakes local production from coal sites. The advent of Information Technology has equally led to boosting of business operations and interactivity among the people living in Botswana. IT has been widely adopted by schools, governments and individuals at large.

Rates of Wages and Housing

Rates of wages and housing are friendly. Wages depend on the sector that one is employed. The average wages for most students living in Botswana is 6750 Rands which is indicated as the disposable salary. Housing rates vary from city to city depending on electricity, water, garbage and other utilities. Rent goes for an average of 2000 to 4000 Rands with amenities costing up to a tune of 800 Rands (Cost of Living in Botswana 2013).

Conclusion Botswana presents itself as a well established country. The political scene has allowed Botswana to enjoy country wide peace thus making it a suitable destination for other citizens. The rates of living are equally favorable to allow low-salaried people to manage livelihoods. Botswana has numerous universities where students can enroll for a variety of degrees ranging from undergraduate to postgraduate.

References Cost of Living in Botswana 2013. Web.

Denton, D n.d., Botswana Country Facts. Web.

Kubuitsile,L n.d., Thoughts From Botswana. Web.

Zijilma, A n.d., Botswana Facts and Information. Web.

We will write a custom Report on Botswana and Its Political, Economic, Social and Technological Areas specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Air-conditioning and Heating Systems Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Introduction The first question to answer when selecting the most appropriate heating or cooling system is whether to include heating, air conditioning, or both. Although air conditioning is a common need in most places today, this can be effectively addressed by considering design and construction requirements, behavior, and other factors such as dehumidification in humid climates (Devoe 2012, p. 356).

Where buildings are to the right standards, the heating system can sometimes be eliminated, allowing the buildings to be heated only by the excess heat produced by occupants and electric equipment.

Ordinarily, homes that require air conditioning must use some type of air distribution system, while those that require only heating have tend to have more options which include both air and radiation distribution (Chiras 2012, p. 13). Understanding the pros and cons of each type of distribution system is very helpful in determining the most appropriate system tom purchase. Other considerations are equipment efficiency, available fuel sources, and the occupants’ preferences.

This paper discusses three types of air conditioning systems and three types of heating systems and suggests, with reasons, the best options from the systems presented.

Heating Systems When choosing a heating system, most people tend to focus more on getting the best modern systems, forgetting that the important thing is to select the type that fits their mode of living, existing climate and type of house. In many homes today, for instance, no one is left in the house during the daytime, when every one is at work.

In a case like this, what is needed is a system that will give quick heat as soon as it is started in the evening. Such systems include steam and warm-air systems. For a household where the care of the heating apparatus is left to the women members during the day, it is desirable to have a system that uses hot water or vapor and one that can maintain a steady supply of heat without requiring so much attention.

In homes where it is the custom, at least once in a while, to close everything up and take a vacation, a warm-air system proves particularly advantageous as there is nothing to freeze. It is also important to consider whether the shape of a house and prevailing weather conditions should form part of the criteria in the selection process of a heating system.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Steam heat, for instance, is not the best choice for a mild and unchanging climate. Ideally, steam heating systems are suited for erratic, up and down temperatures. In general, people with a compact house of moderate size, are in a better position to use a warm-air system than those with a large, rambling dwelling.

To make the best choice, therefore, a careful examination of the necessary requirements, and not only of the advantages and disadvantages of each type of system and its suitability for the particular environment, is critical. Depending on the type of distribution system selected for a house, a variety of heating systems are available. Forced air systems, hydronic floor systems, and electric radiators are among them and are discussed below.

Forced Air Systems According to Binggeli (2011, p. 216), forced air heating system is the most versatile and widely used system for heating houses and small buildings. The system usually burn gas or oil inside a closed heat exchanger to heat the air. The system can include heating, cooling, humidification, dehumidification, and filtration. It provides the least expensive way to distribute heat throughout the house and responds quickly to temperature changes.

A forced air system can, however, cause pressure imbalances and bring pollutants into the house when not properly designed and sealed. An oversized air conditioning system can be inefficient and does not have the ability to properly dehumidify. If not well positioned, some areas of the house can be obstructed by furniture. In addition, a forced air system can be extremely noisy and the noise generated can be transferred between rooms through ducts.

Hydronic Floor Systems Hydronic floor heating systems heat water and propel it through tubes in order to generate heat (Brumbaugh 2004, p. 6). Generally, the systems can classified as wet or dry installations based on how they are designed.

For wet installations, the tubes are normally placed inside foundation slabs and then enclosed in a further layer of concrete to provide some form of reinforcement. For dry installations, however, no tube is enclosed in concrete.

Hydronic floor systems provide heating with lower temperatures than radiators, warm people more than spaces, offer comfortable heating, are quiet, and do not cause pressure imbalances.

We will write a custom Essay on Air-conditioning and Heating Systems specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, they are slow in responding to temperature changes, can only supply heating services, and do not allow air filtration. Furthermore, hydronic cooling systems are rare and are generally only effective in climates with limited cooling needs where the temperature of water can be maintained below the dew point to avoid condensation (Devoe 2012, p. 359).

Electric Radiators According to Linsley (2011, p. 413), electric radiators can generally be classified into two major groups. On one hand are the unrestricted local heating systems provided by portable electric radiators which plug into the socket outlets of the installation while on the other hand are off-peak heating systems that provide central heating from storage radiators, ducted warm-air, or under-floor heating elements.

According to Devoe (2012, p. 359) electric radiators respond quickly to temperature changes, are quiet, and do not cause pressure imbalances. However, like hydronic floor systems, they can only supply heating services and do not allow air filtration. They are also more expensive and can easily interfere with furniture placement in a house. Moreover, radiators covered with furniture are incapable of heating effectively.

In general, electric radiators can be very effective for super insulated homes that require very little heating. They may also be powered by on-site renewable electrical generation.

Air Conditioning or Cooling Systems The type of cooling system best suited for a home depends on a number of factors which include the cost to purchase, install, operate, and maintain the equipment as well as the level desired of efficiency (Carroon 2011, p. 241). In the United States, it is common most new homes to be built with some form of air conditioning.

Since almost all cooling systems are fueled by electricity, and most homes require heating as well as air conditioning, the cooling system decision often follows the heating system decision. Forced air cooling systems, hydronic radiant cooling systems, and hydronic fan coil systems are discussed in the following sub sections.

Forced Air Cooling Systems

Forced air cooling systems are available as split systems or packaged units. Typically, when a distributed cooling system is installed, it is either a heat pump or an air conditioner partnered with a central furnace and a shared channel (Goswami


Abner Louima case and the outcome Essay cheap essay help

The case of Abner Louima was one of the most brutal cases in New York, when a police officer brutalized the arrested suspect with a plunger. The arrest started when police were breaking up a fight between two women outside the club and two men intervened. Abner Louima interfered with the police and after the police officer, Justin Volpe screamed some discriminatory words, Louima allegedly punched the officer. He was arrested for “assault, resisting arrest, disorderly conduct and obstructing justice” (Banks, 2004).

When the suspect was brought into the police station, two police officers took him to the washroom and assaulted him. After the trial Abner Louima was awarded $8.7 million for the way he was brutally treated. The police officer, Justin Volpe, admitted his actions and was sentenced to 30 years in prison, after he left the force. Another officer

Charles Schwarz was sentenced to five years in jail; this resulted from jury deciding that the police officer gave false statements about not taking the suspect into the bathroom. There were other two officers, Thomas Bruder and Thomas Wiese who were taken off the force for obstruction of justice and their attempt for reinstatement was denied (Banks, 2004).

Mayor Guiliani and Police Commissioner Safir were providing full support to Abner Louima and commented that this was outrageous and there would be no silence. They stated the fact that from all police officers present there were only two who came forward and provided the necessary information of what has taken place (Perni, 2005).

Also, Rev. Al Sharpton showed his agreement when he was present with Louima’s family in order to offer any help or advice. The public outcry was of great proportions and people were demanding justice. This was one of several racial profiling and police officer brutality cases and so, the public demanded the justice is served.

The most atrocious thing about the case is that police officers are made to be an example and representatives of the law. The fact that they have some much authority does not allow them to abuse their right to use force and commit the sort of actions criminals are involved in. An important issue of other officers standing by was also examined in court.

There were other police officers in the station at the time of the assault and the fact that they have idly stood by proves that several police officers were corrupt and indifferent to such actions. The case is filled with discrimination and overall unethical behavior but the justice system works, as people directly and indirectly responsible were punished.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The news has been following the case very closely and the public outrage was very much noticeable. Mr. Louima has stated that he considers himself the representative of all the racial discrimination that has been going on by the authorities and he has set up charities for the Haitian community to change things (Alexander, 2010).

In order to prevent these sorts of cases happening in the future, more strict control of officers and police stations should be implicated. A supervisor on duty or someone directly responsible for prevention of racial profiling and unjust abuse should be designated to monitor all activity in the station and in the field. The strict punishments should be maintained, as this sort of injustice is unacceptable in any society.

References Alexander, L. (2010). Encyclopedia of African American history. Santa Barbara, United States. ABC-CLIO.

Banks, C. (2004). Criminal justice ethics: Theory and practice. Thousand Oaks, United States: SAGE.

Perni, H. (2005). A heritage of hypocrisy: Why ‘they’ hate us. Union Dale, United States: Pleasant Mount Press, Inc.


A New Religious America Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

The most important feature in religious diversity is an absolute truth. There are different forms of diversity which include sexual orientation, racial diversity, political diversity, religious diversity, and lifestyle diversity. The development and escalation of diversity in the world are seen as a significant social phenomenon in the society. The focus of this paper is to analyze religious diversity in the U.S.

America has seen an incredible transformation in the religious aspects of its citizens. Varying in beliefs and practices, some religions in America have flourished while others literally disintegrated. This has been greatly influenced by multiculturalism in the United States.

Some religions are formed by immigrant heritages but some were founded from within the stats (Hout


Competitive advantage: Pharmaceutical Industry Report (Assessment) essay help

An excellent marketing strategy is able to find a way for achieving an advantage over competitors in the same field of operation. A competitive advantage is the one that is gained by a firm over its competitors. This can be achieved by offering of greater value to consumers with the help of the provision of low priced commodities or by offering specific benefits to the consumers.

A firm with competitive advantage is able to sustain profits that are above the average level of other firms in the same industry. Such competitive advantage must be sustainable. A competitive advantage should also be unique and relevant to the industry (Stone, 22).

It is important for a firm to have one or more sources of competitive advantage so that there is an increase in stakeholder and shareholder value. It is also a way of attracting investors to the firm since the investors search for a company that has the highest chances of outperforming its peers. With increased investment in a firm, expansion occurs.

This enables the firm to grow at a higher rate. Since competitive advantage comes with low prices for goods and services or the provision of benefits that justify high prices, a firm is able to acquire the loyalty of a large customer base. The revenue of the firm also increases because of the competitive advantage (Wimmer, 23).

For a firm in the pharmaceutical industry, some key sources for competitive advantage include innovation, cost advantage and brand equity. Innovation is an important factor to a pharmaceutical organization that wishes to outperform its rivals.

This process should be progressive to enable the firm to stay ahead of competition by providing unique and innovative products to the consumers. This includes the provision of new pharmaceutical products as well as the re-designing of the outdated ones. A firm that chooses to use innovation as its source of competitive advantage must also beware of technological advancements.

With the fast changing technological landscape, most technologies, ideas and procedures may become obsolete hence creating the need to innovate something new. Such a firm may need to re-invent itself from time to time in order to maintain its competitive advantage (Moingeon and Edmondson, 12).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When a pharmaceutical firm has a technology, a machine or a process that enables it to produce a specific product at a lower cost than its rivals, it may acquire competitive advantage. This may be achieved if the competitors are not able to acquire a similar technology or machine. However, pharmaceutical firms can patent their unique inventions and procedures hence enabling them to enjoy the benefit of this source of competitive advantage.

Having a strong and reputable brand is also a source of competitive advantage for a pharmaceutical firm. This happens due to the fact that a brand can win the preference and loyalty of customers. While making an evaluation of a brand’s equity, reference should also be made to other brands available in the market to ensure that this specific brand is the strongest one. In such case, brand equity may be a source of competitive advantage.

Having a competitive advantage now is more important for a firm than it has been twenty five years ago because of the increase of competitors in the industries. Firms that have enjoyed monopoly twenty years ago cannot afford that luxury now due to the emergence of modern competitors. Therefore, with increased competition, it is important for the companies to have competitive advantage.

Works Cited Moingeon, Bertrand, and Amy C. Edmondson. Organizational Learning and Competitive Advantage. London: Sage Publications, 1996. Print.

Stone, Phil. Make Marketing Work for You: Boost Your Profits with Proven Marketing Techniques. Oxford: How To Books, 2001. Print.

Wimmer, Wolfgang. Ecodesign– the Competitive Advantage. Dordrecht: Springer, 2010. Print.


Vogue magazine cover image Essay (Movie Review) scholarship essay help

Introduction The cover of Vogue magazine that was issued in April has stirred different perceptions among the moderators and the general public. Ethnic and racial issues have been debated by different personalities in relation to cover image of the magazine. James, a well known basket ball star is paired with Jezel who is a top world model. There are other images of the two celebrities that have been used in the magazine.

However, the image on the cover has exceptionally been scrutinized. The paper will outline different opinions in regard to racial issues as far as the cover image of vogue magazine is concerned. Further, the concepts of color effect and personal identity will be highlighted.

Discussion There are postulations that the choice of the cover image was meant to reduce the gap existing among different races. James is a black American and has been paired with Jezel who is white. Some moderators argue that the posture of the basket ball star in the image was a way of showing energy that he puts in when playing.

According to them the image is beautiful and represents different races, an effect that is emphasized by use of top celebrities. The image of two celebrities from different races has been used so as to represent both black and white races and reduce their differences.

On the other hand, some critics suggest that the posture of the two celebrities create an effect that is totally different from enhancing racial equality. As a matter of fact, the image of James has been compared with that of King Kong, a wild monster that murdered people. In the cover image James holds Jezel in a way that is similar to that of Kong when he captured a white beauty.

Most people feel that James who is an African is being compared to a gorilla due to his dark color and posture in the image. The choice of a top world beauty is also very symbolic to the actress that Kong held. There are people who feel that there are many other beautiful images of the two celebrities inside the magazine. According to them the image on cover page was meant to provoke racial genotypes.

Moderators argue that if a white figure was used in place James then the effect of the cover image would change. Based on the color effect that is associated with different races, the image fosters completely different feeling to the public.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More One of the moderators clearly states that when she first saw the cover page, she instantly compared the image of James with a gorilla. Consequently, another moderator says that if a white basket ball star posed in place of James then the image would not impact in the same way.

An advertising agent postulates that the individual identity has more effect on the image, as opposed to collective approach. For example, person playing football is not likely to pose in the same way as another one who is playing basketball. King Kong imagery is present due to the color and posture of James.

Conclusion In what Vogue magazine thought would be historical by incorporating images of celebrities from different races, ambiguous ideas emerge. There are those that see no offence at all and are impressed with the image of the cover while others are offended. Both color and identity of the cover image are essential in different effects of art as postulated by moderators.


Factors that Motivate Chinese Tourists to Travel to Canada Research Paper writing essay help: writing essay help

Table of Contents Chinese Tourism

Chinese Travel Market

Features of Chinese Tourists

Travel Motivations



A large part of international tourists in Canada comes from China. The loosening of travel restrictions and continued economic growth has led to a rapid increase in the figure of Chinese tourists travelling globally. Canada attracts many Chinese people because it is a developed nation.

In fact, most towns in Canada act as residents to the Chinese population since most immigrants from China prefer to settle in these areas. Canada’s stunning and large scenery appeal too many Chinese who intend to visit overseas countries. According to Zhen (2011), Chinese visitors to Canada increased from “138, 014 in 2006 to 159,000 in 2009” (345).

It is in this light that this study aims at finding out motivations that make Chinese tourists select Canada as their tourist destination. The research question is “ What are some factors that motivate Chinese tourists to travel to Canada?”

The study first discusses Chinese tourism as well as Chinese travel market to aid in understanding the case of outbound tourism in China. The study next explores Chinese characteristics and factors that motivate Chinese to travel to Canada. Lastly, the study gives some implications as well as a summary of the study.

Chinese Tourism Many countries can benefit from Chinese tourist activities. Such countries need to understand characteristics of Chinese people, as well as their travel, needs so that they can generate revenue for their economies. While this is true, there is no much information about Chinese travelers because the Chinese travel market is a developing area.

For a long time, the Chinese lacked policies as well as income that allowed touring foreign countries. Also, travel for leisure is rather a new form of tourism activity among Chinese people. This form of travel which does not have any business orientation or family connection is barely 10 years old.

The number of Chinese who travel to foreign countries per year becomes predicted to reach 100 million by 2020 (Guo, Kim,


A Troubled Project at Modern Materials Inc (MMI) Case Study best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Challenges Experienced




Introduction Modern Materials Inc. (MMI) is a company that manufactures materials used as raw materials by other manufacturing and construction companies. It was established in 1927 and known by a different name until 1991, when it became known as MMI. It has experienced constant growth through mergers and acquisitions of other companies. It has since then employed many people, making yearly sales of more than $3 billion.

The company has since then suffered from overcapacity, foreign competition and depressed manufacturing economy issues that have affected its profit margins in the recent past. This led to a study into the occurrences. This study is an analysis of the activities that resulted in the organization’s current status.

Challenges Experienced The company faced a lot of challenges; stiff competition, high staff turnover, inadequate information system, incompetent supply chain management and reduced capital base amongst others. This was followed by a series of activities to wade off competition. In 1995, MMI hired a staff from its competitor, Harvey Woodson, as the executive vice president for quality.

Harvey Woodson, in 1996, proposed a re-engineering of the company’s supply chain so as to give weight to customer service. A massive downsizing followed in 1998, and left the remaining staff stretched and overworked. MMI also lacked an integrated information system that could be used to handle all its operations.

Since the merger and acquisition of other companies to form MMI, the systems that were in use were the once inherited from these companies. It did not integrate the systems into one, but operated on a stand-alone basis.

This was because as the companies were being merged, each was translated into a department and thus moved along with the information systems they were using in their previous environments. These systems, however, could not adapt easily to the new environment, and lacked coherence and hence the supporting information systems became inadequate.

As a result, the exceptional computer controls used to automate the processes were not fully utilized. In the case of staff turnover, there were no systems in place to make sure that there was continuity in the services.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This severely hampered operations within the organization after the 1998 downsizing. For instance, when Harvey Woodson left the organization, the development of the new system came to a standstill since there was no practical replacement for continuity.

Discussion There was no documentation of processes within the company thus hampering the organization’s planning process. When the United Consultants Associates (UCA) was consulted to spearhead the process, the end users were not consulted for their ideas and suggestions. This led to poor decision making that was not consultative. The execution of any project calls for a proper plan.

The use of schedules of project activity such as Gantt charts help in proper planning, and offer the means to which project progress report is given. This was not put in place hence the massive overlap of activities at MMI. Lack of project planning also led to poor labor division, and hence no project direction. This is why most of the staff developing the system did not deliver the expected results (Kerzner, 2009).

There were a lot of assumptions made at MMI. First, it was assumed that downsizing would save costs. Secondly, the MMI management assumed that the organization’s sole problem lied within the supply chain management.

It was also an assumption by the system developers, UCA, that they understood the needs of the users of the system. They went ahead to design a system based on their own understanding. Systems should be changed based on an organization’s needs and not simply adopting what the competitors have done.

After the new system was acknowledged, it experienced a lot of problems that are typical in any failing project. They include negativity by employees, who are the would-be end users in the new Supply Chain Management System. Going through the Case Study, UCA did very little to involve the users in system development.

According to Pew and Mavor (2007), there is a need to involve the users of a system in all stages of a system life cycle ranging from concept design to system testing. This was lacking in the plan for the new system, and is the reason as to why the development of the order-entry system had to be reworked.

We will write a custom Case Study on A Troubled Project at Modern Materials Inc (MMI) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More I totally agree with the work done by Carol Young who was consulted to carry out a review of the project progress. First, Carol chose the best method to conduct search a review; Project Health Check. A project health check is one of the best methods used to carry out a project assessment.

A project health check is very popular with project evaluators as it helps in defining the state of any project at the time of the evaluation, and thus identifies problems in time for corrections. It also helps to find the aspects that may hinder or aid the delivery of project in time. It aids analysis of findings and proper presentation of recommendations in a detailed way (Hut, 2008).

Secondly, Carol Young was right that the timing needed to complete the entire project, and the money needed would shoot from the current projections done by Leach. Such a system is very complicated, and needs the guidance of an experienced person who is familiar with the system development life cycle (Cohen, Dori


IBM – Management Review Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Executive summary IBM is a multinational organization. It manufactures and sells computer software, hardware, mainframe computers, as well as nanotechnology. The company is among the leading computer and electronic organizations based in New York City, United states. It owns and operates numerous franchise companies and multinational businesses across the globe with major branches in the United Sates, India, and Australia.

The ultimate goal of IBM is to dominate in the global market with novel computer and consultation products. Its toughest competitors include Microsoft, Dell, Google, Hewlett- Packard Company, and many more. The presence of these key players in the PC industry makes the competition intense for IBM.

This has forced the company to work out its competitive advantages so as to remain relevant and competent in the market. This is a critical provision in the realms of technology and business expansion. Its objective is to substantially address the needs of its customers. The modern marketing strategies demand organizations to create considerable business provisions (Williams, 72).

In fact, IBM is very good at meeting the needs of its clients despite the challenges. This is how the company has attained its competitive advantages in the global arenas. However, as it continues to grow, IBM has become highly recognized with its brands.

This has allowed the company to remain top in the industry. In the context of management, auditing is a critical provision in the business context. Lack of internal auditors has led to misappropriation of funds in several companies and organizations.

That is why several companies and organizations have adopted it to help in bringing accountability. Leadership management pattern at IBM has really contributed to its success.

An overview of the company Modern business practices especially in the computer technology have gone global. Technological breakthrough is certainly the major contributor to the expansive and ever growing computer industry (Williams 76). A number of companies are finding computer industry a lucrative venture thus creating a greater opportunity for computer technicians who range from programmers to engineers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Computer manufacturing is a diverse industry that incorporates a wide range of specializations. This includes but not limited to software development, hardware development, and developing network infrastructure.

According to Williams (77), the revolution in the Information Technology (IT) has forced majority of organization across the globe to equip their workforce with latest IT devices. This has translated to a major boost in the computer industry.

In the previous decade, IBM enhanced its investment quests in the computer industry. Evidently, different players continue to flood the industry with novel products and ideologies in order to take advantage of the emerging markets and enhance their market divides. It is noteworthy that American companies for a long time have been controlling the global computer industry (Williams, 76).

However, other firms from emerging markets especially from Asia are coming out strongly with various IT products to share the available opportunities. A large number of companies that include but not limited to Dell, Hewlett Packard, Acer, Verizon Communications, Microsoft, Apple Inc, Intel, Compaq, IBM, Asus, Gateway, and Xerox currently dominates the computer industry.

IBM Company has been thriving in the global market for decades. The company offers a wide range of phones, computer accessories, and personal computers (PC) to very many clients across the globe. Its business has today gone global thereby increasing its profit gains. This is a critical observation in the business contexts.

It is vital to determine whether the planned business strategies will help the organization to attain its prospective objectives. IBM is among the top producers of computers in the world today. It is renowned for its continued production of desktops, notebooks, laptops, and net book computers as indicated earlier. Additionally, it has been an active competitor in today’s international computer businesses.

It has been supplying technological equipments ranging from electronics, computers, PDAs, servers, displays, storage devices, Smartphone’s and other peripheral products (Williams, 76). These are produced with the intention of providing man with the best computer devices to make life much better.

We will write a custom Essay on IBM – Management Review specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is also acknowledgeable that IBM Company has been providing e-business solutions and services for governments, businesses, learning institutions and even to home users. IBM Group is currently headquartered in New York, United States.

Previously, IBM Company has managed to streamline most of its operations. This saw the company spinning off a number of its processing and manufacturing operations.

This brought a whole new change in the company as a way of boosting streaming of operations to increase productivity of high quality products capable of meeting the major needs of the consumer (Williams, 76). Leadership management pattern at IBM has really contributed to its success in the computer industry.

IBM Company has since then been in a position of implementing new channels for business modeling. In this trend, the company has shifted from being a leading producer or manufacturer of purely branded company to a complex organization providing consumers with a vast range of technological products.

They have also been the proliferation of different manufacturing firms while the IBM Company has been playing the role of a distributor. This means that there are firms that produce IBM products after which they are distributed to the consumers through IBM Company (Williams, 76).

This means that company only deals with the marketing processes of IBM products around the world. Below is IBM price, earnings and dividend graph and the global market data,

Price, Earning, and Dividends graph of IBM Corporation

The IBM Corporation Company has enlarged its marketing network over the recent years. The advancement in technology has also led to good market forces for this industry although it still faces some stiff competitions (Williams, 72).

Not sure if you can write a paper on IBM – Management Review by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This corporation or industry also tries to come up with some other marketing techniques aimed at surpassing the performance of its competitors. Very many things have to be put into consideration for the successful achievement of these aims and this therefore means that IBM Corporation must have a good strategy or plan that will successfully execute some of its weaknesses and threats (Williams, 76).

Threat is one of the key factors that can lead to industrial poor performance. Just like any other corporation or company, IBM Corporation or industry has to be very wise in decision-making and this only depends on the kind of management system in place. People experiences difficulties in making choices or selection.

Determination of a quality product is not an easy task and this has made IBM Corporation to find more ways of convincing people of the quality of their products.

Latest global market data of IBM Corporation Governance

Porter’s theory of competitive advantage applies to IBM and its brands. The power of its brands is very important component in the differentiation of the prominent market trends (Williams 72). People simply associate IBM brands with standard quality, reliability, and many other intrinsic values. This is due to the fact that brands simply emphasize attributes and meanings (Williams 76).

In a highly capitalist world, brands have important value that could be maximized for profit making (Williams, 76). Branding is a specific marketing strategy and as a way to enhance profitability, productivity and efficiency (Williams, 72). Moor added that branding seeks to develop political message, corporate image, people, and behaviors.

It is in these reasons IBM wanted to invest more in reconstructing, refining and enhancing its brands prior to becoming a cut above the other in its industry. As widely observed, the media have always been the integral parts of IBM’s success in achieving a powerful brand in the world.

As a result, IBM has become an iconic brand because it came to a point of becoming a cultural icon with corresponding identity value (Williams 76). There are many strategies in doing this and they are integral parts of cultural branding principles.

In this paper, the proponent tries to incorporate in the analysis how IBM Corporation was able to successfully achieve or create the power of its brands using the media as integral parts of communication, a specific strategy in cultural branding principles (Williams 76). The discussion in particular includes media, brand development, and the concept of gratification of needs based on psychological perspective.

Being in the computer science field, the organization has had the opportunity to specialize and interact with different computer systems at different levels, including network administration and security. It is worth to enroll in different classes including introduction to operating system, advanced programming, advanced wireless networking and computer systems management.

This is a critical provision I the context of management and operation enhancement. These classes will function as a basis for educational plan in order to achieve the set long-term personal goals. Attending the recent joint Google and IBM technology workshop in New York was beneficial.

Given academic performances, IBM Chief Executive, Virginia Rometty assured me of an internship in their organisation coming next summer. Business management of the IBM Company’s electronic products is what I want to do.

Reasons being: For IBM Company, the global arena has been something of greater interest because it has been engaged in international business. For this company it has been necessary to come up with ways of exploring markets whereby the economic factors appear to favor business operations. The economic position should be able to favor business growth and offer new incentives towards business success (Williams, 76).

Given a chance to manage a Global business like IBM Corporation, It is vital to make sure that there is a proper application of human resource as one of the relevant attributes, which can work miracles for a given organization (Williams, 76).

Why is this so? When there is a proper adoption of human resource management in an organization like IBM Corporation, it becomes very possible to have goals, which make all the employees in the organization working hard to the realization of better objectives and missions, which have been set in place. This enhances a possibility of having better results and provision of all positive services to the clients and stakeholders.

Human resource management, as an important contributory element in management, makes it possible to have all issues within the organization so that all players can be comfortable with the business involvements.

With an educational diploma in management from a reputable management institution, one of the greatest ideas passed to learners is in the manner in which decision-making is done within the organization. Thus it will be easy to engage in positive ways of making decisions in the business (Williams, 72).

During good decision-making, the president would be able to incorporate better strategies through which all individuals and employees in the business shall be encouraged to engage in the process. Decision-making is today the best rule, which has been seeing the greatest number of organizations achieving better performance and realization of their goals (Williams 76).

Whenever managing a business in a company, several elements need to be studied. From different publications, there has been presentation of the major factors affecting business performance both internationally and locally (Williams 78). IBM Corporation has been aiming higher profits within the next five years.

It will be the president’s chance to show that to achieve this there should appropriate utilization of resources and carry extensive studies to outline the major approaches that can improve the overall performance of the company.

The world affairs have constantly been changing. This been the fact, it calls for a company like IBM to use new ideas in analyzing the global business environment and know how to explore the markets. This will make it possible for it to realize its overall gains.

Ethics and Social Responsibility

In IBM, ethical business provisions are critical values, principles or codes of conduct that the company embraces to ensure that its strategic decisions are virtuous in nature. Ethics play a critical role in ensuring a company’s success. Currently, the organization’s culture sets standards that establish the difference between the good and the bad decisions and behaviors.

The manager of the company should play a leading role in the establishment of ethics within the company (Szymanski 23). The employees would only follow what the manager does. The company’s leaders are fully responsible for the setting of standards on what should be acceptable about the behavior of regarding the employees and what is not accepted.

The managers should create a working environment whereby the workers find it easy to work in an ethical way. Normally, clients have associated IBM brands with standard quality, reliability, and many other intrinsic values. This is due to the fact that brands simply emphasize attributes and meanings to the clients (Williams 76).

For a company dealing with electronics and computers such as IBM, there is a very big need to focus on both the micro and macro factors that can affect the global penetration of their products. With the fact that the computer industry has been expanding tremendously, it is necessary to study the changing economic trends in order to make informed decisions towards penetrating new global markets.

The analysis of the global environment is something that offers new insights about the market situation and also helps realize better opportunities. This will also help determine the major strengths and opportunities for the company (Williams, 72). As well, through such analyzes a company can understand the faced threats and weaknesses therefore seek new ways of improving their business.


In this context, organizational structure in IBM is critically established to ensure that the organization attains its managerial objectives. IBM is currently led by Ginni Rometty as the Chairman, President, and CEO of the company. The corporation requires a leader with absolute knowledge of the happenings in the company.

The leader should fully be involved in the business. He should always make sure that a manager is assigned to each department whereby each of them will be in charge of his or her department and must meet with the CEO every week to update him on the happenings and any changes happening in the company (Szymanski 45).

In other words, the company will adopt a functional structure of organization; which is one that isolates some duties and further splits them into simplified ones for specialization. The structure of functional organization divided the company’s activities into functional departments such as production, quality, information technology and accounting.

Events within this kind of structure are divided into functional departments such as information technology, marketing, accounting and research development and customer service. Soon, the company would be very organized and would smoothly develop without any problems.

Production Department

This department mainly specializes in the production provisions. It caters for all costs involved in the IBM’s operations. The department should also be rich in the required raw materials and workforce. Some of the raw materials needed by the IBM Corporation may include various chemicals such as mercury. This department needs skilled labour as it is also divided into subsections in relation to personnel specialization.

Quality department

Quality department ensures standard goods are produced in the production department as this enables the IBM products to have good market forces. This department also provides stickers and any other branding that may be necessary before goods are released to the market.

Accounting department

Accounting department at IBM takes care of all the financials controls activities. Auditing is also found within this department to ensure that company funds are used appropriately, and without any embezzlement. It is vital to consider the aspects of auditing in the organizational contexts.

Sales and marketing department

It is the duty of this department at IBM to ensure that goods are marketed. It is upon the Planning.

Project management is the most appropriate developmental technique in the workplace. It can be enhanced through proper planning designed during the project proposal. Considerable efforts are required in the planning of the implementation, monitoring, and project evaluation.

This technique is more than just the implementation of the activities identified in the log frame; it includes the management of all the components that constitute a project; starting from the resources, risks together with changes to ensure that the project meets its goals within the anticipated quality, budget and timeframe, and concurrently meeting the shareholder’s expectations (Williams, 76).

Scenario planning technique is not efficient or suitable in the workplace due to the increasing complexity of the society, which makes extrapolated trend-forecasts unreliable.

Unless the business setting is simple and the planning horizon is not far, ‘single point’ forecasts don’t reasonably represent the future. Instead of showing a range of possible results, they mainly focus on the identification of the most probable future. Nonetheless, a single point is based on a set of uncertain assumptions (Williams, 72).

The implementation of the scenario planning technique can be done in several types of organizations, at various levels within those organizations, and for many different reasons or purposes.

Nonetheless, any organization that requires a process or procedure for planning for the future uncertainties could significantly benefit from the use of this king of technique. Despite their story-like quality, scenarios follow recognizable and systematic steps. The process is highly intense, imaginative and interactive (Williams, 76).


Leadership at IBM Corporation is considered to be excellent because of the subdivision of the departments. The departmental heads carry out their jobs to perfection as this helps in boosting the company’s stability in the market.

Apart from the departmental heads, the president of the company also have a duty of monitoring all business activities taking place within the company hence taking control over the company’s departmental heads. Management at IBM is such a long chain that starts starts from senor employees to the board of directors.

Senior employees monitor the duties of their juniors. This is how it continues until it reaches the stakeholders or board of governors. Although the IBM president has power to control all the company activities, there are certain limits that may need stakeholders or the board of governors.

When a departmental head has any opinion, he or she has to pass it to the company president who later channels it to the board of directors. This clearly shows that the president’s role at IBM is to monitor and give reports to the board of governors for decision-making. It is vital to understand the business prospects of IBM so as to establish its market strategies.

Leadership management pattern at IBM has really contributed to its success in the computer industry. There is good coordination between leaders hence making it very easy to arrive at a correct decision based on the subject matter. The president cannot run the company alone being that IBM deals in many computer components or activities.

Controlling Management control

The Management Control Review’s purpose at the IBM Company is to examine the whole management system and controls to help the units work more effectively and efficiently. This will also offer a rational level of assurance or assertion that the products and process for which one is responsible are protected sufficiently.

IBM has ratified credible measures to discourage managerial irregularities and erroneous acts. One of the measures considerable in this context is the establishment of the department of internal audit. This is a critical provision in the business context.

The GAO General Management Control Standards

It is vital to establish and embrace credible managerial control standards. Management evaluation should be executed regularly to establish the levels at which the General Accounting Office management and control standards are incorporated within the organization’s virtues.

Concurrently, it should also embrace plans, strategies, and protocols that manage the undertakings and programs of the company. In its evaluation, the following have been ratified:

Adherence to the law

IBM’s operations have embraced global regulations and law. The allocation of resources is effectively and efficiently done to serve the rightly authorized purposes.

Considerable safeguards and assurance

The administration offers considerable assurances to safeguard IBM against misappropriation. This is a considerable provision in the context of management. It is important to understand how IBM safeguards its business provision and administration quests.

Proficiency, Manner, and Integrity

Integrity should be established, ratified, and embraced amidst workers and managers. It is important to understand the values of integrity within the workplace.

Audit Findings’ Resolution

Auditing is a critical provision in the business context. Lack of internal auditors has led to misappropriation of funds in several companies and organizations. That is why several companies and organizations have adopted it to help in bringing accountability, so that the money spent can be accounted for.

Internal auditors play a very critical role in the corporate governance of the company, its financial reporting processes, analysis of risk management and the internal control structure.

The internal audit department has helped in maintaining records of where the money goes, and ensures that the money is put into good use, and not for the benefit of individuals. The department has also helped the organization in knowing if it is making or loosing more money.

Internal audit has helped the company in reviewing the processes’ efficiency as well as the related international standards, shows commitment by the top management, offers scope of improvement, offers information for the management review meetings and also helping in the improvement of the client confidence and satisfaction.

Operations Control

Assign responsibility for the maintenance and reviewing of operational controls

The management assigns the individuals responsible for the maintenance of the controls and for their reviews to ensure that procedures are strictly followed and correction of deviations done.

In general, employees who are responsible for the SEA (significant environmental aspects) are responsible for the implementation of the related operational controls. Nevertheless, it is the responsibility of the immediate line manager to review the controls regularly. The company has listed the individuals responsible for every set of procedures.

Development of training that is operational control-related

The management of the company has ensured success in the meeting of the environmental objectives for every SEA offering sufficient training to everyone responsible for reviewing or maintenance of controls.

Take corrective measure in case objective are not accomplished

The management ensures that actions are taken to correct the failures in the operational controls within the quickest take possible to accomplish the environmental objectives.

Contemporary Control

Managerial control refers to the process by which varying business tactics are established and embraced to evaluate whether the ratified strategies are beneficial to the company’s internal environment. The external environment is also monitored.

More so, the control enables managers to examine the programs of the company from a long term viewpoint. Implementing strategic control is essential as it would monitor two things; that the implementation of the strategy is done in accordance with the plan, and whether the outcomes of the strategy are the intended ones.

This is a considerable provision in the context of management and other business provisions. It is vital to determine whether the planned business strategies will help the organization to attain its prospective objectives.

Behavioral Control

To achieve its objectives, IBM should adopt behavioral control. This is a strategy that would help in the monitoring of employees’ behaviors. It would also examine workers accordingly on the basis of their abilities and competence. The manager would examine the efforts as well as the inputs of the workers and see if they are up to the expectations. Employees should be rewarded in relation to their efforts in the company.

Conclusion IBM is a globalized corporation. It has considerable marketing strategies to ensure that it remains relevant and competent in the market. Their products control the market trends in the realms of technology and novelty. With the modern systems of education, management tactics, and useful theories, IBM has managed to thrive in the market with novel operational ideologies and production systems.

Ideal business strategies can be applied accordingly in any given organization for a better management approach. A number of companies are finding computer industry a lucrative venture thus creating a greater opportunity for computer technicians who range from programmers to engineers. Modern business practices in the computer technology have gone global.

Technological burst through is certainly the major contributor to the expansive and ever growing computer industry. Concurrently, aauditing is a critical provision in the business context. Lack of internal auditors has led to misappropriation of funds in several companies and organizations.

Leadership management pattern at IBM has really contributed to the organization’s success in the computer industry. It is vital to understand that the quality assurance department ensures that standard goods are produced and released to the market.

This has enabled IBM products to have a considerable market penetration. Precisely, it is crucial to determine whether the planned business strategies will help the organization to attain its prospective business objectives.

Works Cited Szymanski, Aleksander. IBM and the business ethics. London: GRIN Verlag, 2011. Print.

Williams, Chuck. Management. Mason, OH: South-Western Cengage Learning, 2009. Print.


Racial/ Ethnic Disparities in Health and Health Care among U.S. Adolescents Qualitative Research Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

This article is primarily a review of already existing data from a study carried out by the National Center for Health Statistics (NCHS). The NSCH offers national and state evaluations of a variety of behavioral, emotional, and physical health indicators. This is evident as the article depends upon or puts reliance on secondary data obtained from the national survey on children’s health.

Secondary researchers do not carry out their own data collection. They rely on data from other secondary sources such as journal reviews, book reviews, and document like the population census and other researches. This article uses a historical research, which involves the analysis and statistical assessment of data that were originally sourced for other purposes (Lau, Lin


Las Vegas Sands Corporation Term Paper college essay help online

Executive Summary History

Las Vegas Sands Corporation was formerly called Sands Hotel in the early years of 1970s, Adelson and his partners acquired Sands hotel in the year of 1989 at a cost of more than $ 800 million.

A year after the acquisition of Sand Hotel, Adelson and his partners opened the Sands Expo and Conventional Centre from the profits generated by the Sands Hotel. In the year 1996, stiff competition from other hotels in Las Vegas Strip forced Sands Hotel to seek for new markets in Venice, which had less competition and a more serene environment (Sands 2).

Traditionally, hotels used to keep few guest rooms; the main aim was to encourage guests to spend more time in casinos and bar lodge, however, Las Vegas Sands Hotels had more hotel rooms, which were furnished with gorgeous furniture, large screen televisions, and big workspace, this created a paradigm in Las Vegas hospitality industry.

In the year of 2004, Las Vegas Sands Incorporation saw a potential market in Asia and opened a branch at Macao; this branch was branded Sands Macao. In the same year, Las Vegas Incorporation was renamed to Las Vegas Sand Corporation in 2004 (Sands 2).

In the year of 2008, there was a global financial crisis, which at some point saw Las Vegas Sands Corp. loss $ 1,000 per second, and its stock fell by 57 % within a period of 52 weeks. In the year 2009, the hotel opened a new branch branded Sands Casino Resort in Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.

In the year of 2010, Las Vegas Sand opened Marina Bay Sands in Singapore; Singapore had a stiff competition from other hotels, however, Marina Bay Sands posted an operating profit of $ 600 million in the first 8 months after commencing its business.

At the beginning of the year of 2012, Las Vegas Sands opened a branch called sands Cotai Central in Macao. Currently Las Vegas Sands investigates the possibility of growing to other countries such as Spain, Japan, Vietnam, Taiwan, India, Madrid, Thailand, and South Korea (Sands 4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Products offered

Las Vegas Sands Corp. offers quite a wide range of products and services to its customers; these products and services include accommodation, bars, entertainment, shopping, and dinning. Las Vegas Sands Corp. has build an air strip which holds ninety Boeing and 747 jumbo jets, exhibition centers in Asia which can hold 15,000 people, and a 550,000 square foot gambling casino.

Additionally, the Sand Casino Resort in Bethlehem provides a perfect gaming centre, Sands Sky Park offers a lush vegetation, several restaurants, infinity swimming pool, conference rooms, and observation deck, and lastly Marina Bay Sands has an Art Science Museum, which is lotus-inspired (Sands 4).


Las Vegas Sands Corp. has grown to a big empire, its size can be estimated by the use of the financial records, its properties, and its employees. Las Vegas Sands Corp. properties in United States are two AAA Five Diamond luxury Resorts build along the Las Vegas Strip: The Palazzo and The Venetian Las Vegas.

The Sands Expo is in The Palazzo and Venetian Resorts. Sands Bethlehem in Bethlehem, Pennsylvania is another property of Las Vegas Sands Corp and it occupies 126 acres, it is in United States. In Asia, Las Vegas Sands Corp. owns the Iconic Marina Bay Sands in Singapore.

In China, Las Vegas Sands Corp. through its subsidiary that is, China Sands owns more properties in Macao, China. These properties include The Venetian Macao, The Sands Macao, The Plaza Macao, and Four Seasons Hotel Macao, Sands Cotai Central, Conrad, Sheraton, and Holiday Inn hotels.

This shows how Las Vegas Sands hotel has grown because it has a big territory with huge markets extended to almost each major tourist’s destinations to net each tourist.

Target Market

Market targeting involves selecting a specific class of clients, which a corporate aims its goods and services at. Las Vegas Sands Corp. targets the markets, which are romantic in nature and attract couples for their honeymoon or provide a serene relaxing environment.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Las Vegas Sands Corporation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Las Vegas Sands Corp. targets both local and international markets; local markets are the markets in the country of its origin. The local markets and branches include Las Vegas, which is a city in America.

International markets include Asia, Europe, Venice in Italy, China, Singapore, Spain, Japan, Vietnam, Taiwan, India, Madrid, Thailand, South Korea, Sands Expo, Sands Macao, Palazzo Las Vegas, Boulevard Las Vegas, Venetian Macao, Sands Casino Resort in Bethlehem, Pennsylvania, and Marina Bay Sands.

Competition Business competition is rivalry between two or more sellers offer the same but differentiated product or service to the market at different prices to win customers. Las Vegas Sands Corp. is facing a stiff competition from its competitors though Sands has several competitive advantages.

Sands has opened numerous branches in the local and international markets, this helps the hotel in diversifying its competition risks. A company with several service and products outlets maximizes its sales in the less competitive outlets hence diversifying its competition risk.

Sands hotel competitors include 7 Days Group Holdings Limited, Ameristar Casinos Incorporation. Boyd Gaming Corporation, Caesars Entertainment Corporation, Century Casinos Incorporation, China Lodging Group Limited, Choice Hotels International Incorporation, Full House Resorts Incorporation, Home Inns and Hotels Management Incorporation, Hyatt Hotels Corporation, Intercontinental Hotels Group, Isle of Capri Casinos Incorporation, The Marcus Corporation, Marriot International, Melco Crown Entertainment Limited, MGM Resorts International, Monarch Casino, and Resort Incorporation among others (Hoovers 2).

SWOT Analysis SWOT analysis is an exceptionally useful instrument for evaluating and making decisions for all situations affecting the business and organizations. SWOT is a short form word for Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats.

Strengths (S), and Weaknesses (W) analyze the internal factors, which the company can control, and Opportunities (O), and Threats (T) analyze the external factors, which the company cannot control.

SWOT analysis is used to audit the general position and the environment, which the company is operating in (Walker 90). It is the responsibility of the managers to supervise the process of carrying out SWOT analysis and implementation of the recommended solutions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Las Vegas Sands Corporation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More SWOT analysis helps a company identify the main factors affecting the company’s performance but the analysis rarely provides solutions to the factors. Companies can carry out SWOT analysis regularly because it is cost effective to the company; companies do not finance for SWOT analysis to be carried out by external firms (Walker 94).

Limitations of SWOT analysis are SWOT analysis does not prioritize the factors affecting the company’s operation, the analysis does not offer solutions or alternative decisions, the analysis can produce different ideas but does not choose the best, and the analysis generates a lot of information and not all of the information is useful to the company (Griffin 2).

Las Vegas Sands Corp. has strength over the main market position in the tourism and hospitality industry. Las Vegas Sands Corp. faces no significant new competition up to the mid-decade within Asia and Las Vegas (Griffin 3).

The Sands is best placed to exploit expansion opportunities in the Asia, with a leading position in Singapore (about 50% of market share) and a sturdy competitive position in China (about 15% of market share) (Sands). The Sands has a sturdy economic command, it possess one of the only two licenses to run casinos in Singapore and one among the six licenses to run casinos in China.

The Sands is an excellent operator of integrated hotels that generate high returns on invested wealth, and The Sands record place it in a position to win casino gambling legalizing licenses for new markets (Sands 6).Strengths are the characters that enable a company to accomplish its mission.

Strengths are the special and distinct feature, qualities, and traits that a company posses; these features give a company its consistency in service or product provision (Griffin). Strengths beneficial to a company include financial resources, human competencies, customer goodwill, products, and services, and brand loyalty.

Las Vegas Sands strengths include potential financial resources, broad product line, committed human resource, and reputable public relation. Las Vegas Sands Corp. is opening new hotels in different regions in annual basis.

Other strengths are main market position, strategic partnerships, and performance across segments, and increasing operating efficiency. Las Vegas Sands Corp. has strength of strategic partners for carrying out business together.

In china markets, The Sands has partnered with sands China Limited and build The Venetian Macao, The Plaza Macao, The Sands Macao, and Four Seasons Hotel Macao, as well as the most recent addition: Sands Cotai Central, which glorifies the world’s largest Sheraton, Conrad, and Holiday Inn hotels.

Strategic partnerships give Las Vegas Sands Corp. leverage in accessing a foreign market with ease because their partners are aware of the trends of the market (Sands 6).

Weaknesses include the qualities that harbor a company from accomplishing its mission hence slowing the company’s success and growth (Griffin). Weaknesses in a company may be caused by inadequate research facilities, poor decision-making, thin product range, and depreciating machinery.

A Las Vegas Sands Corp. weakness is the narrow product range; the corporation specializes in hotel services only without any outdoor services, awaiting legal actions, and high leverage (Hoovers 3).

Las Vegas Sands Corp. faces the weakness of pending legal undertakings between the Sands and the United States justice department. Las Vegas Sands Corp. has several pending court cases, in one case one the Las Vegas Sands casinos was accused of money laundry by the United States justice department.

The above example is one among the pending legal actions awaiting The Sands and once determined may result into a heavy fine. Heavy fines or cancellation of the casinos operating licenses may cripple the operations of The Las Vegas Sands Corporation (Sands 7).

High leverage is another form of weakness faced by the Las Vegas sands Corporation. Leverage is the amount debts that a company owes. The business of gambling casino is highly risky, The Sands needs to maintain a large cash reserves to cater for the increasing risks in the market. Increasing debts results in to low profit share to the shareholders and poor payments to the employees (Sands 7).

Opportunities are offered by the surroundings within which a company operates. Companies can expand their competitive advantage according to the available opportunities; a company should grasp opportunities once they arise (Griffin 4). Las Vegas Sands Corporation opportunities arise from the market, industry or government, technology, and competition.

Las Vegas Sands Corp. opportunity is the increasing touring sites and tourist in the continent. Other opportunities are strategic development, growing demand for gaming in Macau, developed gaming, and resort destination in Singapore.

Las Vegas Sands Corp. has an opportunity of strategic development. Strategic development is brought about by Innovation, which is an important tool for business ventures. Businesses use strategic development to exploit changes as an opportunity arises for a different business (Alpha 2).

Strategy development has creative ideas that address the demand-side wants and generate products as the supply-side solutions. The operations and capability to implement the ideas effectively and regularly measure the business efficacy. The Sands has used the above ideas to grow its business by opening new branches and differentiating their services to gain the market edge (Alpha 3 ).

Threats occur when the external environment jeopardize the smooth running and cash inflow of a company. The external environment cannot be controlled by the company and it relates to the weaknesses (Griffin 4 ).

Threats faced by Las Vegas Sands Corporation include of threats are employees unrest, changing technology, increased competition from the other tourism and hospitality companies, world economy, and different trade laws governing different countries. Other threats are decreasing consumers spending, competitive pressures, and stringent regulations (Sands 8).

Competitive pressure is a threat to Las Vegas Sands Corp (Griffin 4). Increasing competition leads to reduced operating profits of a company because of the reduced amount of sales and cash inflows. The Sands expanded to Venice in Italy because of the stiff competition from other hotels in Las Vegas Strip (Hoovers 2).

The American market, China market, and Singapore markets competition is increasing without a significant increase in the target customers. Tourism and hospitality industry all over the world is receiving new entrants, which mean the products, and services offered are of high quality (Alpha 4).

Decreasing consumer spending is a threat to Las Vegas Sands Corp. because of the fluctuating economy (Griffin 4). Consumer spending is measured by analyzing the movement of goods from several sellers to the customers in a certain market. Companies in the tourism and hospitality industry are experiencing a reduction in the purchasing power of consumers.

This has affected the total turnover of Las Vegas Sands Corporation, a reduced turnover results in to losses on the part of the company. Las Vegas Sands Corp. has retrenched a total of 485 employees in the last two months because of increased debts and operating expenses (Alpha 3 ).

In my own view, Las Vegas Sands Corporation has a potential of expanding its territories and diversify its market risk more despite its increased leverage. The corporation has a competitive advantage over some of its competitors, this because of its management’s ability to make effective decisions about their new target markets that turn out to be a great success once ventured.

Las Vegas Corporation has made effective use of the SWOT analysis in making the most crucial decision. However, The Sands needs to reduce the rate of growth and allow the already constructed resorts and hotels gain a larger market share and win customer loyalty from its customers.

Works Cited Alpha, Seeking. Las Vegas Sands: Macau Results Could be a Mixed Bag. 2012. Web.

Griffin, Ricky. SWOT Analysis: A Tool for Making Better Decisions. New York: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Risk Management Agency. 2008. Print.

Hoovers. Las Vegas Sands Corporation Competitors. 2012. Web.

Sands. Brief History of the Sands. 2012. Web.

Walker, John. Introduction to Hospitality Management. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2010. Print.


The Impact of Tourism on the Ecosystem Research Paper argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

According to Beaver, “tourism is the temporary, short term movement of people to destinations outside the places where they normally live and work, and their activities during their stay at these destinations; it includes movement for all purposes as well as day visits or excursions” (313).

Beaver argues that tourism arises from a number of factors (313). “Tourism arises from the movement of people to and their stay in, various destinations” (Beaver 313). Tourism is made up of two major components: “the journey to the destination and the stay including the activities at the destination” (Beaver 313). Usually, the journey and the stay take place in an area that is different from the normal place of work or stay.

As a result, tourism gives rise to activities which are different from those done while at work or at home. On the other hand, “Dickson defines ecosystem as a community of living organisms with the physical processes which occur within an environment” (2).

Ecosystems often interact in a variety of ways through their biotic and abiotic components. Ecosystems often encounter stresses imposed by human activities and physical environments. In addition, they encounter changes which may be caused by human activities.

An example of human activities which cause changes in the ecosystem is tourism. One of the most difficult problem facing environmental scientists is diagnosing the nature of environmental change.

Not only is the extent and rate of change often hard to detect, and even harder to predict, but it may also be very difficult to distinguish between those components of change which are part of a natural process and ecosystem dynamics, and those which are as a result of human impacts.

Yet unravelling all of these issues is vital if ecosystem function is to be sustained and irreparable damage to the biosphere avoided. This paper attempts to analyse the impact of tourism on the ecosystem.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to Bio Intelligence Service, “people are great consumers when on holiday” (1). Recent studies have indicated that the ecological footprint in some parts of the world is almost same as that of residents. Bio Intelligence Service notes that, when arrival transport account is put into consideration, this ecological footprint escalates. Tourism forms the backbone of many economies around the globe.

However, it has been found to exert indirect and direct pressure on species and habitats and, as a result, it poses a significant threat to conservation. Furthermore, tourism often disturbs wildlife and heightens environmental pollution due to increased transportation of people. The negative impacts of tourism on ecosystem are aggravated by the fact that tourists tend to consume more than the local communities.

In addition, tourists tend to consume more when they are on vacation. A study was conducted recently in Val di Merse, Italy, to determine the ecological footprint of tourists in this region. This study found out that Val di Merse receives a total of 685 tourists per day. As a result, the local population is increased by 5 percent.

The researchers “gathered data on arrival transport, on food and fibre consumption, on accommodation, on land use, utilities and waste, on local transport and on activities of tourists on holiday in Val de Merse region” (Bio Intelligence Service 1).

The study revealed that arrival transport contributes 86 per net of the total tourist impact on ecosystem. The study indicated that “the total impact of one tourist is 38.08 gha/per year” (Bio Intelligence Service1).

RAMP notes that “while recreational activities that take place in lakes, streams, wetlands, and their riparian areas are most likely to negatively impact the aquatic environment, land based activities can also impact the environment” (1).

RAMP indicates that tourist activities such as fishing and hunting of sea animals often lead to the decline in the pollution of aquatic species (1). Tourist activities also alter the aquatic habitat. For example, predator prey interactions are likely to be altered. Aquatic habitat is likely to be distorted by pollution and alterations in the neighbouring habitats.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Impact of Tourism on the Ecosystem specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More “Off highway vehicles, including all terrain vehicles, Argos, dirt bikes, and off road vehicles, driven trough or across steams and other water bodies can lead to habitat destruction and degradation, including loss of stream bank stability and erosion” (RAMP 1). On the other hand, when tourists come into contact with wildlife, wildlife behaviour is often affected.

Johnson notes that the growth of tourism around the globe has overlooked concerns of increasing ecological resource use (2). Of late, various tourist attraction sites and infrastructures have been identified as sites of resource overconsumption.

Johnson argues that ecological footprint is essential in the evaluation of different types of tourist behaviours and choices. According to Johnson, “an ecological footprint examines the amount of natural resources required to support a specific type of behaviour, business or process” (2).

A recent study funded by World Wildlife Fund sought to evaluate the use of ecological footprint in the evaluation of the impact of tourism on ecosystem. The study collected data “on bioreproductive land, Bioreproductive Sea, built land, energy land, and area for biodiversity” (Johnson 6).

During the study, “the ecological footprint of each resort was broken into a number of key areas of ecological impact; air travel, waste, food, and hotel energy use” (Johnson 6). The research was conducted in Ontario. The study revealed that tourism has a total impact of a 45.79 gha/per year on the selected region (Johnson 6).

On the other hand, GDRC indicates that tourism has a number of physical impacts (1). It causes trampling. In this case, vegetation and soil are often disturbed when tourists use the same route over and over again. Anchoring activities also degrade the ecosystem.

“Anchoring, snorkelling, sport fishing, scuba diving, yachting and cruising, are some of the activities which can cause direct degradation of marine ecosystems such as coral reefs, and subsequent impacts on coastal protection and fisheries” (GDRC 2).

In addition, tourist activities might alter the ecosystems in a number of ways. “For example, wildlife viewing can bring about stress for the animals and alter their natural behaviours when tourists come too close” (GDRC 2).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Impact of Tourism on the Ecosystem by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As noted earlier, tourism forms the backbone of the economy of many countries in the world. Many governments have invested heavily in the promotion of their tourist destinations. Some of these developments have a significant impact on nearby ecosystems.

For example, many natural lands located close to wildlife ecosystems are being cleared to create space for the construction of centres which will accommodate the growing number of tourists. In addition, most governments have converted natural wildlife ecosystems into national parks and game reserves. Confining wild animals in national parks and game reserves significantly affects their behaviours.

The reproduction of these animals is restricted and this can result into the extinction of the confined species. In addition, their natural feeding habits are affected. Some of these animals are fed on synthetic foods which might hamper their health. Furthermore, the confining of wild animals into national parks alters food chains and food webs in the natural world.

Hotels and recreational centres which are located close to water bodies often discharge wastes into these water bodies thus affecting the aquatic ecosystem.

Moreover, there is an increase in the consumption of sea foods. Many resorts located close to water bodies often offer sea food to visiting tourists as one of their special meals. Tourism contributes to the increase in the demand of sea food and indirectly affects the aquatic ecosystem due to overfishing.

In summary, this paper has noted that “tourism is the temporary, short term movement of people to destinations outside the places where they normally live and work, and their activities during their stay at these destinations; it includes movement for all purposes as well as day visits or excursions” (Beaver 313).

Beaver argues that tourism arises from a number of factors. “Tourism arises from the movement of people to, and their stay in, various destinations” (Beaver 313). Tourism is made up of two major components: “the journey to the destination and the stay including the activities at the destination” (Beaver 313).

Ecosystems often encounter stresses imposed by human activities and physical environments. In addition, they encounter changes which may be caused by human activities. An example of human activities which cause changes in the ecosystem is tourism.

One of the most difficult problem facing environmental scientists is diagnosing the nature of environmental change. Not only is the extent and rate of change often hard to detect, and even harder to predict, but it may also be very difficult to distinguish between those components of change which are part of a natural process and ecosystem dynamics, and those which are as a result of human impacts.

Yet, unravelling all of these issues is vital if ecosystem function is to be sustained and irreparable damage to the biosphere avoided.

Experts argue, “people are great consumers when on holiday” (Bioscience Intelligence 2). Recent studies have indicated that the ecological footprint in some parts of the world is almost same as that of residents. Bio Intelligence Service notes that, when arrival transport account is put into consideration, this ecological footprint escalates. Tourism forms the backbone of many economies around the globe.

However, it has been found to exert indirect and direct pressure on species and habitats and as a result it poses a significant threat to conservation. Furthermore, tourism often disturbs wildlife and heightens environmental pollution due to increased transportation of people.

The negative impacts of tourism on ecosystem are aggravated by the fact that tourists tend to consume more than the local communities. In addition, tourists tend to consume more when they are on vacation.

Tourist activities such as fishing and hunting of sea animals often lead to the decline in the pollution of aquatic species (RAMP 1). Tourist activities also alter the aquatic habitat.

For example, predator prey interactions are likely to be altered. Aquatic habitat is likely to be distorted by pollution and alterations in the neighbouring habitats.

“Off highway vehicles, including all terrain vehicles, Argos, dirt bikes, and off road vehicles, driven trough or across steams and other water bodies can lead to habitat destruction and degradation, including loss of stream bank stability and erosion” (RAMP 1). On the other hand, when tourists come into contact with wildlife, wildlife behaviour is often affected.

Works Cited Beaver, Allan. A Dictionary of Travel and Tourism Terminology. Derby: Macmilan, 2010. Print.

Bio Intelligence Service. Environmental Impacts of Tourism. June 2010. Web.

Dickson, Gohr. Ecosystems. Vancouver: Oxford, 2010.

GDRC. Tourism’s Three Main Impact Areas. May 2012. Web.

Johnson, Allan. Exploring The Ecological Footprint Of Tourism In Ontario. Waterloo, Ontario: Oxford Press, 2010.

Regional Acquatics Managment Program (RAMP). ‘Potential Effects from Tourism and Recreation on Aquatic Ecosystems.’ 2012. Web.


Ethical Issues in the School Case Study cheap essay help

Robert is a disruptive student whose case raises several ethical concerns. The first one is that he does not follow school rules and regulations as a student. He is also disobedient and bullies other students in class. Teachers do not expect their students to behave in such a manner hence the behaviour portrayed by Robert is not ethical.

The second ethical issue raised in the case is that Robert has gone to the extent of stealing a phone from the bag of another student. Stealing is not accepted whether the person involved is a teenager or an adult. It is wrong for Robert to involve himself in stealing because this is likely to cause serious consequences.

To begin with, it will affect his studies negatively. Secondly, legal action might be taken against him because stealing is prohibited by law. The third ethical issue raised in the case is that Robert risks being expelled from the school completely although he is capable of changing into a good student and a kind person.

Since the case of Robert is a serious ethical issue, it is important to apply certain ethical approaches and theories in order to handle it effectively. The first ethical theory that will guide my action in handling the case is deontological theory.

This theory argues that human beings are governed by certain moral rules that cannot be broken. According to deontologists, doing the right thing is considered ethical regardless of whether the outcomes are good or bad.

My actions will also be guided by utilitarianism theory. This theory focuses on the outcomes of a certain decision. According to the theory, choices or decisions that benefit a large number of people are considered ethically right.

In Robert’s case, the concept of good denotes actions that are acceptable to the school administration and ones that do not disturb other people within the school environment. This theoretical approach provides a rational approach for making a decision on the most appropriate thing to do in the case of Robert.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this case, there are two options of action that can be used to handle the situation. The first option is to expose Robert as a thief because information about the stolen phone has spread in the school and the girl concerned is distraught.

The second option is to summon Robert privately, counsell him and get the phone without informing everybody. Robert should not be exposed to the rest of the school members if he apologises because he has the potential to change and become a good person if the problems he faces at home are solved.

In this case, the option I will choose is to report Robert to the school principal for the necessary action to be taken. The first reason behind this decision is that Robert has been a disruptive student in many occasions.

He bullies other students, yells in class, and does not do assignments. It might be assumed that he will change with time but this might not be practical because the principal has warned him many times without any success. He has even gone to an extent of giving Robert a last warning.

One of the factors that might prevent me from taking this action is the fact that I have observed Robert for six months and I think he can change into a good and kind student. This might be true but eventually the action will have to be taken because even after several warnings, he has not changed and still behaves unethically.

It is unethical to keep him in the school with the hope that he will change yet he does not show signs that he will change. Exposing him might have negative consequences since he will be expelled out of school.

However, this is the most appropriate option because according to utilitarianism, it will result in the greatest benefits for the people in the school. Robert will suffer but teachers and students will be free from his disturbance.

We will write a custom Case Study on Ethical Issues in the School specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Philosophically, the decision to expose Robert as a thief is the most appropriate method of handling the situation. This is because this decision will have the greatest benefits for the majority. In addition, the decision might have short-term negative implications for Robert but eventually, it will prevent him from getting into more trouble.

For instance, his behaviour has shifted from causing disturbance to other students and disrupting normal school operations to stealing. If he is allowed to continue stealing, he might continue doing it until he lands in prison. It is therefore philosophically right to expose him as a way of preventing him from getting into bigger trouble.

The course of action taken in this case is consistent with choices ethically conscientious people make. An individual who is ethically conscious looks at how the majority benefit from certain actions although some individuals might suffer.

In the case of Robert, the most appropriate action is to expose his unethical behaviour that disrupts other people. Some people might think that he should not be exposed as a thief but instead should be given a chance to reform and change his behaviour.

However, he has been warned several times and he seems not to change. It will be unethical to give him more time to change while he disrupts normal school operations. The decision to expose him is therefore consistent with choices made by conscientious individuals.

Deontology and utilitarian theories have been used to analyse the case of Robert. The two theories will assist an individual in everyday decision making. It is important to make decisions based on certain theories since they provide insights on what is ethically acceptable.

Deontological theories argue that it is important to do what is right regardless of the outcomes because human beings have obligations that are not supposed to be broken. This theory will assist individuals in everyday decision making because some situations make it difficult to make the right decision.

Utilitarianism is the second theory that will be useful in everyday decision making. According to utilitarian theorists, decisions should be made on the basis of their benefits for the largest majority.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ethical Issues in the School by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This implies that our actions should not favour individuals at the expense of a larger group of people. The theory is therefore important in everyday decision making because it enables individuals to make decisions that benefit the majority.